JP6795278B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally also referred to as "pachinko machines") and rotating cylinder type gaming machines (generally also referred to as "pachislot machines").

In the game board of a game machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like, a game area is divided in front of the game board, a start winning device, a special winning device, a game part, etc. are arranged, and an installation provided on the back side of the game board. A symbol display device, an effect device, or the like arranged on the member faces the game area through an opening provided in the game area. The starting winning device and the special winning device are provided with a winning opening through which a game ball can enter, and an opening / closing body or an opening / closing door for opening / closing the winning opening, or an opening / closing body or an opening / closing body whose operation is controlled by a main control means. The opening and closing door is opened and closed. In addition, the production device for producing the effect to enhance the interest of the game is provided with a liquid crystal display device for displaying an image such as a moving image and a plurality of types of movable bodies capable of operating between the initial position and the operating position, and the effect control means. A plurality of motors as operating means for operating a plurality of types of movable bodies together or individually are provided (Patent Document 1).

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a driver board manufactured as a board separate from the sub control board and independent of the sub control board is connected to the sub control board connected to the main control board via the signal line. Will be done. A driver that exclusively controls a two-phase excitation motor or solenoid is mounted on the driver board, and each driver on the driver board is connected to the corresponding two-phase excitation motor or solenoid via a signal line. Each control product provided in the effect device is connected to the sub control board via each signal line. A serial method is adopted for the output of the control signal from the sub control board to the driver board.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-346369

The game machine is provided with a plurality of stepping motors, and is provided with a plurality of shift registers and drivers for driving the plurality of stepping motors. By the way, when the motor is driven at a temperature higher than the specified temperature, the motor is driven with the phenomenon that the resistance value of the coil of the motor becomes small (short mode). For example, when the resistance value of the motor is 50Ω, it drops to about 5Ω in the short mode. Since the power supply voltage (for example, + 24V) applied to the motor does not change, there is a problem that a large current flows in as the resistance becomes smaller.

There is also a problem that not only the motor is damaged by the large current flowing in, but also the driver is damaged by the large current flowing into the driver, and the heat generated by the damage may affect the driver. This is, ing also the cause of secondary failure.

Therefore, the problem to be solved by the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to avoid a secondary failure when a large current flows into a drive source on the production side. The purpose is to provide a game machine that enables the above.

The gaming machine according to [Solution 1] is used to solve the above problems.
The main control board that controls the progress of the game,
Peripheral control board that performs production control and
A control board that controls the effect unit based on the control data transmitted from the peripheral control board is provided.
The peripheral control board and the control board are connected to communicate and connect the control data.
The peripheral control board has a control data output means for outputting the control data to the control board.
The main control board includes a first driver circuit unit that is electrically connected to the first drive source and drives the first drive source.
The control board, a second drive source and is electrically connected to a gaming machine having a second driver circuit for driving the second drive source,
The second drive source driven by the second driver circuit unit is via a current blocking component that can block the current by flowing a current exceeding a predetermined current provided on the control board. through driving source power supply line connected to the second driving source, the power drive source of the supply voltage and the same potential to the first drive source connected the main control board and electrically is Ru is supplied,
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of the solutions 1], when the driving source of the effect side overcurrent flows to be that supply lines corresponding to the damaged rendition side drive source when damaged, this power line The fuse corresponding to is blown before the other circuit part is damaged. Therefore, even if the drive source on the effect side is damaged, it is possible to avoid damage to other circuit units.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, even if the drive source on the production side is damaged, a secondary failure can be avoided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of a lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. In (a), in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, a part of the operation button is cut out and a part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. is there. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends in the state which turned forward. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the QQ line in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117 as viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 117, as viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 121 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 123. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 123. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 129. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control unit and the like. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 135. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. It is a block diagram which mainly shows a peripheral control board and an upper decoration drive board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit deployed on the upper decorative drive board. It is the continuation of the circuit diagram of FIG. 143. It is the continuation of the circuit diagram of FIG. 144. It is a continuation of the circuit diagram of FIG. 145. It is the continuation of the circuit diagram of FIG. 146. (A) is a diagram showing the excitation data of the stepping motor in a tabular format, (B) is a timing chart of the excitation data serially transmitted from the peripheral control board to the upper decorative drive board, and (C) is the excitation of the stepping motor. It is a figure which shows the order of a phase in a tabular form. (A) is a diagram showing the serial data reception order in a table format, and (B) is a reception timing chart of serial data transmitted from the upper decorative drive board to the peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the judgment information judgment processing executed by the peripheral control MPU.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which connect both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the changing game state when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. The effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and the door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from island facilities (not shown in a box shape) and a game ball attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass inside which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are housed therein. It includes a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. It is provided with a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. It includes an upper part on the left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to the left and right center on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness are the same as the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed from the front surfaces of both left and right ends to the rear. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a symmetrical shape in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, they are recessed inward on the outer side surface in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that the game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be opened and closed and supported. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward from the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is columnar, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are further provided with a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. To.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 show the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 17B is an outer upper side view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. Therefore, the lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

Then, in this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction of moving to the right, the right surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be in a held (locked) state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted further to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

Further, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth in a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for removing the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball rental display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display an effect image. It includes a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and at the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to the tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. The door frame base 110 includes a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312. Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. The upper side and the left and right sides of the through hole 111 forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The passage port 117 for the dish, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. Sheet metal 132, vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front left side of the door frame base 110, and vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the front right side of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a cutout portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of protruding pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the side view shape is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the collar member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When the operator holds a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is used. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a good state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. In the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151, a mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is a door extending vertically from a height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through hole 111. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protruding portion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Then, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 regulates the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate so as to protrude upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. Absent.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that protrude into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of the flat plate-shaped main body 201 having a predetermined outer circumference and the flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 10008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feed unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate by operating the pull-out button 327.

In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens below the entrance 251a and whose rear is open, and a box in which the rear end of the front cover 251 is closed and the front is open. A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, a rear cover 252, and a front cover. With a ball pulling member 253 having a partition portion 253a which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and which partitions the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. , The game balls on the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can rotate around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feed member 254 supported by the ball feed member 254 and a ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254 are provided.

In the ball feed unit 250, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a, and the ball feed member 253 is on the left side of the ball feed member 254. Ball feed solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side, respectively.

The front cover 251 of the ball feed unit 250 is provided with an arcuate slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 253 on the left side of the ball extraction port 251b in front view, and the slit 251c is provided. The working rod 253c of the ball pulling member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed taxiway 323e and the ball removal taxiway 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion that is open to the rear of the end side from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 253 has a partition portion 253a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 254 and a ball of the partition portion 253a, which is below the entrance 251a and is partitioned between the entrance 251a and the ball ejection port 251b. It extends downward from the end on the opposite side of the feed member 254, bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. From the side surface of the rotating paddle portion 253b that is movably supported, the rod-shaped operating rod 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating paddle portion 253b, and the rotating paddle portion 253b below the operating rod 253c. It is provided with a weight portion 253d projecting to the side opposite to the partition portion 253a. The working paddle 253c of the ball pulling member 253 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating paddle 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the actuating transmission unit 327a operated by pressing the upper plate ball pulling button 327 of the plate unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 253a of the entrance 251a and the ball pulling member 253, and the rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It is provided with a ball holding portion 254b recessed in an arc shape toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 254 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric with the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 255.

The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing toward. When the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied to the ball launching device 680 from the hit ball supply port 252a, and the game ball that has entered the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking portion 254a blocks the movement of the ball holding portion 254b (ball striking supply port 252a) side, and stays on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the paddle portion 254c side closes the ball hitting supply port 252a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255, and a ball feed operating rod 256 that swings back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 has an engaging portion 257a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and a shaft portion 257b that extends upward from the shaft portion 257b and feeds the ball. The member 254 includes a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operating rod 256 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 that advances and retreats in the vertical direction by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to transmit the ball feed member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located in. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255, the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 is released. The game ball received by the solenoid can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 in the ball feed unit 250 is controlled by the launch control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 682.

Further, the ball pulling member 253 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 250 is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 253d rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, but the ball feeding member 253 projects forward. Since the operation rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmission unit 327a operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320, its rotation is restricted. The partition portion 253a of the above partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not invade the ball outlet 251b side.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a and moves downward of the operation transmission unit 327a. Along with this, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball pulling member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Will be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

The upper plate ball removal slider 327b on which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is formed is urged upward by the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, so that it is on the partition portion 253a. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball pulling spring 327c via the operating pad 253c, and it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 253 and the like from being damaged. , It is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 253a.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and the ball feed unit 250 is formed. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 261 and the upper piece portion 261 which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other. .. The upper piece 261 of the fraud prevention member 260 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 252a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball to which a string is attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250 by the ball launcher 680, and is attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating a string to move an illegal game ball in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launcher 680 causes fraud. A string attached to the game ball was inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, and then the V-shaped narrowed shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262. It can be cut depending on the part, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using a fraudulent game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272 and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is a penetrating ball that communicates the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full-tank ball receiving port 274 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the passage 273 and the penetrating ball passage 273 in the front view and can communicate with the full-tan taxiway 862 of the lower full-filled ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And have.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 274 and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is fired by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 275 that receives the game ball (foul ball) and the game ball that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and are received by the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are forward. It is provided with a ball discharge port 276 that discharges to and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the dish unit 320.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed by the unit body 271 and the lid member 272 between the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharging port 276, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a large size, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. It includes a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in the direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 that urges the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277.

When the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game ball can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full with the game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower plate 322 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the payout of the game balls is stopped. It is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 322.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and is a taxiway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the working protrusion 863e of the 863 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed so that the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball in the upper plate 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. It also includes a handle cover 303 that can be attached to the handle base 301.

Further, the handle unit 300 is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302 and the handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301. The handle base 301 and the inner have a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

Further, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 308 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side are attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 urging in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301 from the left side to the outside. The single-shot button 311 that protrudes and the base end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304 so as to rotate around the axis, and the single-shot button 311 is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting the pressing operation. It is equipped with a single-shot button operation sensor 312.

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 301a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 301b protruding radially from the front end of the base 301a, and the cylindrical base 301a. It also has three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180, and the ridges 183 are formed in the three groove portions 301c, respectively. By being inserted, the handle base 301 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

The handle 302 has four first protrusions 302a, a second protrusion 302b, a third protrusion 302c, and a fourth protrusion 302d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. The locking protrusion 302f is provided.

The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusion 302b, the third protrusion 302c, and the fourth protrusion 302d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 302b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 302b is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly low. The side surface of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction of the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the anti-city decision on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed like this and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 302a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 302d is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of the fourth protrusion 302d are inclined in a substantially straight line, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a whose front center is round and bulges forward and projects rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle mounting member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 is attached. The handle unit 300 attached via the slingshot unit 300 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 682 in the ball launcher 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the launch solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. It is not possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player is rotating the handle 302, the single-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the launch control unit of the payout control board 951 (illustrated). Is omitted) to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311, the driving before operating the single-shot button 311 is performed. The game ball can be hit into the game area 5a again with strength.

Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most in the front-view clockwise direction. The position of the first protrusion 302a when the fourth protrusion 302d does not rotate the handle 302 when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"). By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state, and the game can be played. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41A is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. Further, FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. It is provided with a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

The plate unit 320 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323, and the left side from the center of the left and right bulges forward greatly. The upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and the lower plate main body 325 which is attached to the left side of the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325.

Further, the plate unit 320 is a front view of the upper plate ball removal button 327 and the upper plate ball removal button 327, which are attached so that they can be pressed from above on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326. The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the ball lending button 328, and the ball lending button 328. And the ball rental display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and the lower plate ball removal button 333 that protrudes forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322 and is attached so that it can be pressed from the front. I have.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side side bulges forward more than the center on the left and right sides of the front view, and is formed in the shape of a container opened upward. Has been done. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 321 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. There is. The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (upper plate ball removal button 327). ) Is submerged (see FIG. 44).

The upper plate 321 is assembled on the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined so that it is slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a to the upper plate. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed so that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction is narrowed is lowered downward. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 projects from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal ground fitting 321b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), it becomes a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a and allows the game balls to be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. It is provided with a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect effect operation unit 400 (second effect effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

The lower plate 322 has a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k of a plate unit cover 326 that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open lower plate main body 325. The dish unit is formed by a dish unit base 323 that closes the rear side, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of a portion protruding into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the lower dish body 325. It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 is a trapezoid in which the outer peripheral shape in a plan view is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the bottom is arranged on the front side. It is formed in a shape similar to a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat plate-shaped bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. It is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base, the upper side shorter than the bottom is arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides extending diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (upper surface) is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center of the lower plate main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the front view on the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover an approximately right half portion above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 is omitted from the cover standing wall portion 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. It includes a horizontally extending ceiling portion 340b. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to the rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side in the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface-shaped portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion diagonally extending between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (directing operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the front left end to the right side of the portion extending shortly to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the lower plate 322 is the directing operation unit 400 in the front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half wraps around the rear of the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes the lower plate first region A1 (the area of the crosshatch in FIG. 45) located behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 described later, and the lower plate. Lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area) and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has more than half of the storage area (corresponding to the storage area in the plan view, which is the combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which the game balls can be stored. It is located behind the production operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted hatch is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction in the front view. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 which is behind the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be scooped out from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (dish unit cover 326) that bulges forward toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range that can be seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed larger in the lower plate second region A2 than in the lower plate first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

In the lower plate 322, the right half (lower plate second region A2) in the left-right direction of the lower plate main body 325 is the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326 as shown in FIG. ), And the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertips from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. The lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, when the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid with a narrowed front side on the front side of a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the bottom surface is a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, with the lid member 334 opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a open, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the open lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball supply is provided when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, but is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The sphere comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved diagonally with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is this. When it comes into contact with an inclined portion, it reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c does not enter the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and immediately from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, so that the lower plate 321 and the payout device 830 are used for payout. It is possible to give the illusion that the game ball or the like is directly discharged to the dollar box, and by making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can play the game (the operation of driving the game ball). And directing images, etc.) can be devoted to suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower plate 322 Even if the game ball supplied to the inside jumps up in the lower plate 322, it is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the mounting space 326j side from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It can be prevented, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from damaging the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, it is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Since the game ball can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Can be done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 can reduce the impact when it comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damages them. It can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper plate ball removal button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be further exerted. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as separate parts, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Further, an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, but the lower plate cover 340 rises from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a, but the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. It may extend substantially horizontally from the upper end.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. It may be a lower plate 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (lower plate main body 325, lower plate cover 340, etc.) is shown to have a uniform surface shape without a through hole, but a plurality of penetrations through which the game ball cannot pass. It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which the game ball cannot pass. It may be a thing or a thing formed in a net shape. In addition, a light emitting body such as an LED may be arranged in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322 through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower dish 322 (to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322). ..

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the four members may be integrated to form the lower plate 322 in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate main body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. Integrated, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. , The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide on the lower plate]
An embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 including a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from that in (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the ball guide part further different. In FIG. 46, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (a), the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c arranged apart from each other on the left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guide portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the pair of ball guide portions 322c without getting over the ball guide portion 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the punch hole 322a.

Then, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate second region A2) in the same manner as described above. The punch holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guide portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, it is an illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

In the example of FIG. 46A, a rail-shaped ball guide portion 322c is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed on the right wall portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and a cushioning portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, foam, or the like.

Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is tilted so that it becomes. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is directly discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is reflected in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Will be done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also rearward to the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326 which is the lower plate second region A2) in the same manner as described above. It is arranged behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340) so that it cannot be seen from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the cushioning portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d can reflect the sound in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharge it downward (dollar box) without sound. Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the game balls are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), the portion of the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in between. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from the plate and reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. For the return portion 322e, the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322 may be used, or a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that alleviates the collision sound at the time of reflection may be used. Further, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower plate 322.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326. Behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400 which is the lower plate second region A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the return portion 322e allows the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side. It can be reflected downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is the explanatory view which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. In the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47, the lower plate main body 325 can be divided with the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It includes a main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B which is attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2. The first extension unit 325B is more than the main body unit 325A, and is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A) in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated. It protrudes into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, the first extension unit 325B is formed with a relief portion 322b in the right front corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than the example of FIG. 47 (a). , The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is formed by a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2 and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the main body. It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C which is larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the width of the second extension portion 325C in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end is formed to be constant, and the storage area of the game ball is formed larger than that of the first extension portion 325B. Further, the lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C is attached to the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C to the main body portion 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage areas of the game balls Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C in the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. It is formed so as to create a space).

As described above, in the above example, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) has a structure that can be divided and at least one of the divided members can be exchanged, the game ball in the lower plate 322 The storage area can be increased or decreased as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes rearward (inside the mounting space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), but the dividing line PL is below. It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first region A1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325, but the game ball is on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat plate-shaped closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided like the lower plate main body 325, and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion can be divided. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (rear is opened) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110. It is formed in a shallow box shape).

The plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 323a and the upper plate ball supply port 323a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c penetrating the front and rear at the lower part on the left side from the center of the left and right in the front view and extending in a tubular shape to the rear. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d which penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 324.

Further, the plate unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e that guides a game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging from the lower side of the feeding taxiway 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to be lowered toward the right side surface of the tubular front view of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and is extended from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. The ball-extracting taxiway 323f that guides the released game ball to the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower end of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e and the upper end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f on the left side of the front view of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e. With an opening 323g that penetrates back and forth at a height between the two, comes into contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250, and the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by the upper plate ball removing button 327 protrudes rearward. , Is equipped. The downstream end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f opens into a tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 323c.

Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. 323i is provided with a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 and the tubular rear end is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. It penetrates 117 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

The lower plate ball supply port 323c, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a tubular rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. Then, it is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325. The dish unit cover 326 is provided on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the effect operation unit 400 is mounted and the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and opens wide in the front in the left-right direction. The plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and the plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed below each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b are provided. There is.

The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction. It is formed at a height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves rearward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front surface of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left-right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 ends on the left-right center side and the left-right end sides. The middle part is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the. Further, the lower end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined so as to move upward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 is inclined so as to move upward in the left-right direction. It is formed so as to narrow in the vertical direction from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward the left and right end sides. In the plate unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view.

The front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the left-right center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left-right end sides, and the left-right center end and the left-right end side of the dish unit cover 326. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the middle part is recessed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the.

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating the front and rear is formed in the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the plate front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side of the front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled in the dish unit 320.

The front lower right decorative portion 326c on the right side of the front view has a handle insertion port 326f that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and into which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, is formed.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the right side of the front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h causes the upper plate 321 to have a plate-like top plate portion 326h. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The plate unit cover 326 includes a flat plate-shaped bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The lower side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, in the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j that is open forward at the portion of the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends in a flat plate shape from the left side and the upper side of the lower plate opening 326d to the rear, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). .. The lower plate cover portion 326k is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is in contact with the right end. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321. By pressing the upper plate 321, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is moved to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although detailed illustration of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is left and right below the top plate portion 326h by the ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends to. The upper end of the ball pulling lever extending vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball pulling button 327. The ball pulling lever is slidably attached in the vertical direction by a ball pulling base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball pulling button 327.

Then, the ball pulling lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball pulling button 327 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the upper dish ball pulling slider 327b slidably attached up and down by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is provided with an operation transmission portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327a is formed from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is urged upward by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c causes the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever to be used. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission portion 327a of the upper plate ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission unit 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball pulling member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball pulling member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 253a enters. The partition between the port 251a and the ball ejection port 251b is released, and they are in a state of communicating with each other. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

When the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the operation. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult to make the player feel the troublesomeness of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to dedicate the player to the game (driving operation of the game ball, production image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As shown, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the front view of the upper plate ball removing button 327 on the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is attached to.

The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses it to plate a predetermined number of game balls. It is rented (paid out) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is inserted, the lent out game ball is deducted and the cash or prepaid card is returned.

Although not shown, the ball rental display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED arranged under the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or It displays an error code, etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the figure, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex directed to the right on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 can be used by the player in the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. On the other hand, when the effect image prompting the selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated within a predetermined time to select the desired option. ..

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower plate ball removal button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower plate 322, and projects forward from the lower front lower end of the lower plate front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side of the front view. By pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball removal button 333 can be slid in the front-rear direction by the lower plate ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 under the lower plate body 325. It is attached to. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

The lower plate ball removal base 335 is accommodated in a portion of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 that is formed in a stepped shape so as to be recessed from the lower side to the upper side at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower plate ball removing base 335 has a discharge port 335a having the same size as the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and penetrating vertically at a position directly below the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322. .. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower plate ball removal base 335 also opens, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a And are in communication with each other.

Although not shown, the lid member 334 is rotatably attached to the lower plate ball removal base 335 about a position to the left of the lower plate ball removal button 333 in a plan view. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball extraction base 335. As a result, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

Although not shown, the lower plate ball removing base 335 has a holding device for holding the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball removing button. A lower plate ball pulling spring that urges the 333 forward is attached. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. The lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened by moving, and the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device so that it remains moved backward. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is maintained in an open state, and the lower plate is maintained. The game ball in the 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

Then, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is open, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed backward to release the holding by the holding device. In this state, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower plate ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed by moving. As a result, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

In addition to the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327 also moves the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a (discharge port 335a). The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be opened. As a result, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, simply operating the upper plate ball removal button 327 causes the dollar box via the lower plate 322. It is possible to simplify the labor involved in removing the ball. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and FIG. 53 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 mounted on the mounting portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the effect. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so as to bulge forward on the central side, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side and are arranged in a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b and the like.

As shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which project rearward in a columnar shape along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a tubular opening extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to come into contact with the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is closed by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame body 416 that is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from the position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and the portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right side portions of the notch 416c are mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on the frame top lens 418 enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the board base 421. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. Both the front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative substrate unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the operation button 410 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

The base unit 430 consists of four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically at the center, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, and an operation button internal decorative member 432 that is attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and has a short tubular shape in the front-rear direction. The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 attached to the left and right sides of the through holes 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decorative member 432, respectively. The operation button upper inner decorative board 435 and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear, and the frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. It includes a decorative substrate 437.

Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three pressure detection sensors 440, which are attached to the 439 respectively to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side is provided.

The outer shape of the unit base 431 is substantially circular, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially quadrangular through hole 431a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431a has a size that fits within the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed to a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the outside of the through hole 431a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 431b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 431b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. ..

Further, the unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the portion where the inner decorative substrate 435 on the operation button is attached and the portion where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper part of the front surface. It has. With this light-shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending shortly in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. It is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 432e, which project rearward from the surface and are mounted on the unit base 431.

The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

In the operation button interior decorative member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button internal decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , It is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric circles centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b. It is provided with a second button internal decoration portion 432 g (see FIG. 63), which is provided in a plurality of shapes. The second button inner decoration portion 432g is formed so as to have a portion extending parallel to the four inner periphery of the opening 432c.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed of a transparent member. The rear part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 cannot be clearly seen due to the lens effect of the first button interior decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and these LEDs are mounted. By emitting light, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be made to emit light. By luminescent decoration of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 is white. ..

The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431. When the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b, and the front end is a guide boss protruding rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 440 have one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one on the lower left side on the front surface of the unit base 431. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b of the above via the sensor holder 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 on the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view. The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decorative board 433, an operation button right inner decorative board 434, and an operation button upper inner decorative board. 435, decorative board under the operation button 436, frame top lens decorative board 437, pressure detection sensor 440, and door frame side effect display device 460 for relaying the connection between the door frame base unit 100 and the door body relay board. It is a thing.

The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 extends substantially horizontally on the lower surface when assembled on the door frame 3, and is between the leg portion 442a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operating unit 400 is restricted downward, and the effect unit mounting portion of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4e. Door frame side production display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front side and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. It is provided with a bottomed square tubular mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed to have the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the bottom portion of the bottomed tubular shape is attached so as to abut the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62A shows a production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by a first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 protruding forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for production in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the production operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for production in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 to make it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit attachment of the frame unit 415 attachment portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Although a gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outer peripheral gap of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button to be opened from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer circumference of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the concave-convex line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, it is possible to show the moving decoration to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of the player, and it can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of them emit light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 is emitted. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. Since the operation buttons 410 are arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 when viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a plurality of frame top lens decorative substrates 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of the second embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the second effect operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the above effect operation unit 400. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. In the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as the effect operation unit 400 will be described below with the same reference numerals.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base unit 450, which is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front side, and the second base unit 450, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are provided.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A covers the surfaces of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it is provided. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

The second production operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decorative board 482, a switching drive motor 492, and a projector 500. The purpose is to relay the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It is provided with an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

The specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second production operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 have the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex toward the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles facing the triangle and a triangle having one apex facing the opposite side of the center are arranged alternately over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, and a button lens 411 in the truss-shaped pattern. A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a base facing the center side of the surface, a side extending from both ends of the base toward the center of the button lens 411, and an oblique side extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base. And the diagonal side of the right-angled triangle pattern, the side extending from the center of the base of the triangle of the truss-like pattern to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right-angled triangle pattern, and the right-angled triangle shape from the tip of that side. It is formed by a variable isosceles triangular pattern composed of a side extending to the tip of the diagonal side of the pattern.

That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is composed of a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle constituting the first button decorative portion 411a has its own surface facing in a different direction and is formed in a polyhedral shape. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, whereas the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. The plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner at this portion, and the light passing through this portion is diffusely refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to diffuse refraction.

The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 is held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the tubular shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to move forward and backward by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from the rear.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The second effect operation unit 400A can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the board base 421. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A is attached with the operation button 410 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

The second base unit 450 protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the rear of the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c in the button base 413 of the operation button 410. An operation button spring through which four cylindrical button shafts 452 and four button shafts 452, which are slidably inserted from each other, are inserted and the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 is urged forward. (Not shown), and three pressure detection sensors 454, which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect each of the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 has an annular main body 451a, a cover portion 451b that hemispherically protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that is a substantially square shape that extends vertically when viewed and penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front to the rear of the main body portion 451a in a blind hole shape, and the main body portion 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e, which is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the main body portion 451a, and the upper bearing portion 451e, which is vertically recessed from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body portion 451a, are semicircular in the same direction. A pair of rotation restricting portions 451g that are formed on both the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a and the lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed in a (U shape) to regulate the rotation of the screen unit 470. And have.

The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference formed in substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, rotates. There is. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from behind.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis of these four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d projects forward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the tubular guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can be done.

The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. ..

Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the operation buttons are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. The 410 is urged forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U shape with the front open and extending rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular shape are coaxially located. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front side, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

Each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e in which the extension line (face) thereof is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed so as to be separated from each other in a predetermined angle circumferential direction about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulate the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by abutting the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

Although not shown, magnets are embedded in each pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and by magnetically adhering to the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, they come into contact with the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b allow the screen unit 470 to be in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the second with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to rotate due to the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 is suppressed on the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second production display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 rotatably attached around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. The upper bearing member 480, which is mounted on the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounts the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 are mounted. It includes a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

Further, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side rotates the screen unit 470 and is installed in the rotation drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and in the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and capable of projecting an effect image onto the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. The box-shaped projector mounting member 505 whose front is open and the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 are mounted so as to cover from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. The upper cover 506 is provided, and two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 and detecting the rotation position (rotation position) of the screen unit 470 are provided.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 around an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be visually displayed (projected) by the player.

The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical shape, a milky white and translucent main screen 471, and a disk shape having one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer circumference, and the central portion is an axis. The sub-screen 472, which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, is milky white and has translucency, and the main screen 471 protrudes outward in the axial direction from the center of both ends in a columnar shape. Penetrates the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. Subscreen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.), which is transparent and formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and subscreen 472, which is attached to the back surface side of the subscreen 472. The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the screen and the end of the main screen 471 opposite to the sub-screen 472 toward the central axis of the main screen 471. It is provided with a semi-arc-shaped peripheral decorative member 478 that extends shortly.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The length of the main screen 471 in the axial direction is formed to be about 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. Both ends of the main screen 471 in the axial direction are decorated so as to be bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape coincides with the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). .. The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in a circumferential direction. It is provided with a curved surface-shaped screen portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape as a whole so that the inner peripheral side projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in the direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 and are rotatably attached.

The actuating gear member 475 protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half a circumference by meshing with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b is provided with a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in an arc shape about the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by contacting the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetized with a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become like.

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the subscreen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

The subscreen decorative member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472b of the subscreen 472. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness thereof changes in a complicated manner, the transmitted light is complicatedly refracted and the rear can be visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the sub-screen decorative member 476 has the characters "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

The subscreen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the subscreen 472 so as to form a gap between the subscreen 472 and the subscreen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477a are attached to the front side (the side facing the subscreen 472). Is implemented. The outer shape of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is smaller than that of the subscreen decorative member 476, and the surface is white. By emitting light from the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the sub-screen decorative member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can strongly illuminate the "eye" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH" by emitting light from the LED 477a.

Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a is made to emit light. , The point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the subscreen decorative substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 on the subscreen 472.

The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a row in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are the main body portions of the unit base 451 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f which are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of the 451a. Further, in the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 from the front, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451 the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

The upper bearing member 480 is a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and the bearing member. A frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481 is provided. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the screen is internally formed. A stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arc-shaped recessed 481a allows the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 to satisfactorily rotate between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state of being assembled to the second production operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and whose rotary shaft projects into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the switching drive motor (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first spur gear that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 495.

The rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A, and the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotationally drives the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project the effect image onto the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 that is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward in a columnar shape from the projector body 501 and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. It is installed like this.

The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. This projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal type projector, and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. By mounting the projector mounting member 505 on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, it is possible to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. .. A plurality of slits 505a penetrating the front and rear are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and is attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position facing forward, and the detection piece 475c in the second position where the sub screen 472 is facing forward. The time detection piece 475c and the time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signals of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and cushions the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above to reduce the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit, and the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat plate-shaped cushioning member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the lower surface of the cushioning member 511. It includes a cushioning base 512 that is mounted relative to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the cushioning member 511 and a leg piece that projects downward from both left and right sides of the main body 512a and extends in the front-rear direction. It is equipped with 512b. The leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

In this cushioning unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the cushioning member 511 in the cushioning unit 510. Move down to. The impact is absorbed by compressing the cushioning member 511. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512. Since a gap is formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b of the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body 512a. When the 505 further moves downward, the flat plate-shaped main body 512a bends, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. , The impact will be transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4g-7. Action effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends with the screen facing forward. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 77A shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410, and to let the player operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

The total height of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being attached to the dish unit 320. A gap is formed in. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. At an angle of 63 degrees, it is tilted so that it moves upward as it moves forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (second production operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shaft 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 is slid on the four tubular guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A has the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 due to the urging force of the operation button spring, and the frame unit 415. It is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416.

In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has the center side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

By the way, in the operation buttons for production in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Because of the shape), when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. Since it is generated, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (near the upper part of the operation button 410) where the player can press the operation button relatively easily, the vibration is strong against the player who is pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a in which the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is applied in multiple stages due to elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body 512a of the cushioning base 512, and the like. It can be absorbed, and it is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second effect operating unit 400A, etc. is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and make it difficult to damage. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) that protrudes forward, it is compared with the case where it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are high, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. The decoration due to the unevenness of the 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge part of the part inside the button lens 411 by the decoration of the unevenness combining the triangles. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device. A gap is located between the 460A and the outer circumference of the screen unit 470, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the front side (player side) to be seen from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470. It is possible to make it difficult to see the members of. As a result, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can see the operation button 410. It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc., which are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer circumference of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc., pass through the transparent button lens 411 from the player side. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outer part (the part of the crosshatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (in FIG. 76, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line). ) Is hidden from the player's side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the second production operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

Further, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The sub-screen decorative member 476, the upper shaft member 473, and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub screen 472 and the fact that the main screen 471 can be rotated. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. A movement exceeding the player's expectation can be performed in the button 410 to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the state of the second position where the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decorative member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain the player.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 capable of visually recognizing the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner circumference to the center side of the button frame 412. A polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a that combines a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width is provided, and a door frame side second effect display arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 is provided. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged in a row, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap each other so as to intersect with each other. It is possible to show the complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, as described above, since the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of triangles, the peripheral decoration portion 472a mainly composed of quadrangles and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the eyes of the player As the position moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, so the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can change to show the player a moving decoration, and the player can create a deep, three-dimensional decoration. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the drive of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward, or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, when the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and are vertically extended. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration consisting of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row traverses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decorative portion 472a is in a state in which the peripheral decorative portion 472a is elongated in an annular shape, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a circular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's attention can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or the decoration can be changed. The change can make the player suggest the arrival of an opportunity, etc., and can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a screen having different screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) that can be switched to the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display the effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given and entertained. More specifically, in the screen unit 470, the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 having the disk-shaped and relief-shaped sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center are the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided with a rotation angle of 90 degrees about the axis and separated in the circumferential direction.

Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction. When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and is milky white having translucency. Through the main screen 471 of the above, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the surface of the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the display screen of the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. As a result, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the player can see the conventional display screen at first glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from the above, to surprise the player, and to draw the player's attention to the main screen 471, and to entertain the effect image projected on the main screen 471. be able to.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decorative member 476 that imitates a skull appears to be located in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear in this state, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since the flat and translucent sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is blocked, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, by emitting the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see, and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light emission.

The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side emits LED 477a of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the subscreen 472 where the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the part outside the subscreen decoration member 476 made of decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decorative member 476, which is inside the sub-screen decorative member 476, is luminescently decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the luminescent decoration of the fixed sub-screen decorative member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), which is completely different from the luminescent decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can draw the player a strong attention to the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the production image inside the production image, so that the production image is partially bright, which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a production image that makes the player more entertaining can be displayed.

As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the decoration of the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478). As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front surface and the light such as the effect image to the front behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided with the projector 500, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Further, behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420 The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410. It is possible to switch to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 to display the effect image, and to present to the player an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with a conventional pachinko machine. , Can give a strong impact to the player and entertain.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. FIG. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 78C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a with a circular front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square front view quadrangle corresponding with the rectangular opening 531a. It includes a lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. The input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection portion 532c) and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole, moving forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

The square lens portion 532b is assembled on the door frame 3, and the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 inside the square lens portion 532b reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 81). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then dividing a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Since the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with more uniform light. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in a vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted from the lens.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle having a front view extending vertically, and is formed in a square tube shape extending forward and backward. The portion of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative base 534 on the left unit is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U-shape with the front view open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves backward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535, the lower end of the upper dogleg-shaped part, and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. 82 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 86 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffuser lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and on the right side of the front view center of the right unit base 551 and the right unit left diffuser lens. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffuser lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a right unit right diffuser lens member 556 that is attached to the right surface and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are open. The box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are attached so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portions 553e are centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. It can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed at substantially the center of each vertical direction when the left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface is refracted so that the light from the left LED 552a spreads, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view as the whole moves forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left shading member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f to the left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559 Since the light that reflects toward the main body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched from the left end side in the front view to the right in a quadrangular shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the inner LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of inner LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at substantially the center of each vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decorative member 557 can be visually recognized. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left shading member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body 559a to the right in the front view, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It includes a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. It can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths, and three sets separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right shading member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left shading member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 decorates the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. The light emitting decoration can be made only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedron decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron composed of a plurality of triangles is vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward from the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to feel as if he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 87A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 and a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extending left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central side end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate through each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. It includes a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in a shape such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends diagonally forward to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, a plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a deformed pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square in the left-right direction is located downward, and a deformed pentagon extending outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the deformed pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 near both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side near the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It has.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the irregularities of the square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the direct portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a right triangle connecting the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It has a right-angled lower wall and is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with open spaces between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The middle left decorative board 586 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the middle left decorative substrate 586 of the door frame top at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The middle right decorative board 587 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the middle right decorative substrate 587 of the door frame top at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out backward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and left and right of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 near both ends in the left-right direction. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Action and effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through-hole 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed rearward (dish unit). It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to operate the production operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from the front or the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the plate unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction and on the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged below the front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. it can.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball supply port 323c has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly fed to the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be reflected on the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand in or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can let other players around you play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be light-emittingly decorated on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and fronts on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surface of both the left and right sides of the 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. it can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top interior decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration has a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, since the door frame 3 projects the top middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction to the front, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. It includes a main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and is a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a front view right side surface of the main body frame base 600. The locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out the game ball to the player side, a board unit 900 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable and closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and the game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a game. The game board mounting portion 602, which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 602 project upward from the center in the left-right direction and are left and right of the lower end of the game board 5. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the movement to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided on the right side of the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launcher 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 and the launch device mounting portion 604. The cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the door of the board unit 900 which penetrates back and forth from the center of the front view of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and below. A circular shape that penetrates back and forth between the connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward and the lower left side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 602 so that the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 faces forward. The speaker opening 607 and the like are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 601 to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 can be rotated at the rear end. It includes a rear extension 608 that can be attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and is attached to the upper hinge for attaching the upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side and the lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side. A portion 609 and a lower hinge mounting portion 610 are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

The upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side has an upper hinge main body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 621 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621, which penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side of the front view of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. It is provided with an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for the purpose. The downwardly bent portion of the upper hinge main body 621 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the main body frame base 600.

The lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side penetrates up and down at the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641. A lower hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown) that is pivotally supported by the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 and a flat plate that is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the shaped plate is bent upward in an L shape, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 which penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The hinge hole 644 for the door frame for axially supporting the door frame and the hinge hole 644 for the door frame at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame 3 It is provided with a regulation piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of the.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, the horizontally extended portion is above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 with a certain interval, and the portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641. In the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600, and also enters the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft is attached to the launch base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a hitting mallet 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and a hitting mallet 683 extending diagonally upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684, which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 so that the game ball can roll.

In this ball launcher 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball struck by the ball hammer 683 is guided through the launch rail 684 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, etc., between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). Then, it falls into the rail ball receiving port 275 of the lower rail cover unit 270, passes through the rail cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 701 that protrude forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar projecting forward from the lower part of the unit base 701 A protrusion protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is transmitted according to the rotation direction of the key. It is provided with a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Payout unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 99A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. Further, FIG. 101A is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the payout device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in (a). Further, FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. Is.

Further, FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 111A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and FIG. 111B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. .. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper part of the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the ball tank 802 that stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (not shown) in the shape of a box that extends upward and to the left and right, and the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802. It is equipped with a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in the front view. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that hangs swingably from above.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and the ball guide unit 820 below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And have. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830.

Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and also guides the game balls downward according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A taxiway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full taxiway 862 that guides to the full taxiway receiving port 274, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The lower full tank path unit 860 and the like are provided.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guidance unit 820 has a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has an open front side, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends are connected to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 through the partition plate 823. A pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear movable piece members rotatably attached by the attached rod-shaped shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. It includes an 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 that is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotation positions of a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guidance inlet 821a that is open so that the game ball can pass through at the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 821c that communicates the 821b, the ball guidance inlet 821a, and the ball guidance outlet 821b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 821f that extends from the detection unit 821e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 821e in the guidance passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guidance inlet 822a that is open so that the game ball can pass through at the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 822c that communicates the 822b, the ball guidance inlet 822a, and the ball guidance outlet 822b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d extending obliquely from the ball guidance inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 822e in the guidance passage 822c.

After this, the rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction when assembled to the ball guidance unit 820. There is.

The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extension portion 825c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a from the upper end of the movable piece 825c, and the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole protruding outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d and penetrating back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. The detection piece 825f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 825a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 825 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d is located directly below the shaft hole 825b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 825a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is in a state of protruding into the guidance passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is provided. The guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e) is in contact with the outer wall. When the stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 821c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (to the right in the front view), the left surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. Consistent with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball breakage detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The movable piece member rear 826 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a from the upper end of the movable piece 826a, and the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. The detection piece 826f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 826 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d is located directly below the shaft hole 826b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 826a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guidance passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g The guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e) is in contact with the outer wall. When the stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 822c (to the left in the front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member 826 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. Consistent with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a row in the front-rear direction by a tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are in a state in which the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. The 822 can guide the lower payout device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by a partition plate 823, the game balls circulating in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and are satisfactorily distributed. Can be done.

Further, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a come into contact with each other. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate in the direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that the game balls are in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

Then, when the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball in the guidance passages 821c and 822c flows downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes a movable piece at the upper part of the detection units 821e and 822e. It bounces toward the 825a and 826a sides and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the movable pieces 825a and 826a are sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust and dirt, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by their own weight or the like.

Further, the ball guidance unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and also detects the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of 826 after the movable piece member is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable piece member is in front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the 825 or the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball disappears are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. To. Therefore, since the out-of-ball of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be replenished promptly, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. It can be suppressed.

Further, by screwing a metal screw as a weight into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight As a result, the lower end side of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. It is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, in the ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game ball flows due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight. The lower end side of the 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a (825 in front of the movable piece member and 826 after the movable piece member) do not rotate.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e which are the through holes, the weight is attached even if the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate frequently. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member (weight mounting portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. .. Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. This makes it possible to reduce the cost associated with assembling the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. As the game ball flows in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and the movable pieces can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of the single member and the 826 after the movable single member can be made to rotate satisfactorily.

Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the 826 after the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to false positives and the like. Further, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the presence or absence of the game balls can be quickly detected. It is possible to replenish the game ball, and by shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Payout device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, and has a payout entrance 831a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 831b, the ball outlet 831c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout entrance 831a and the payout outlet 831b are connected to each other, and the game ball can be distributed to the payout passage 831d. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c to allow game balls to circulate, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-shaped with the front side open, with a payout entrance 832a open in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through, and a payout entrance 832a on the bottom surface where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass. The exit 832b, the ball ejection outlet 832c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout passage 832d that communicates the payout entrance 832a and the payout outlet 832b, and the payout passage 832d that allows the game ball to circulate. It is provided with a rear box 832 having a ball-extracting passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-extracting outlet 832c so that game balls can be distributed.

Further, the payout device 830 is mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and is mounted in the front box 831 and the rotating shaft penetrates the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 mesh with each other and can rotate with the front box 831 and the front cover 833. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate, and the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and the rear The shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and the shaft member 838 which is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838 and the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. It is equipped with a payout blade 839 that is arranged inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat plate-shaped partition plate 841 that separates the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. The payout detection sensor 842, which is attached between the box and the rear box 832 and detects the game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, the payout passages 831d and 832d, and the ball removal passage. A movable ball removal piece 843 that is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at the portion where the 831e and 832e are branched and can close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the front box 831 and the rear. The box 832 is provided with a ball pulling lever 844 which is slidably attached up and down on the upper right side surface of the front view and makes the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball ejection outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 831d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 831d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 831a to the lower right is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed on a guide shelf 831f in a portion of the payout passage 831d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 831b and protrudes rearward as it goes downward, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 831 g for slidably mounting the ball pulling lever 844 up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball ejection port 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 832d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 832d extending diagonally to the lower right from the payout entrance 832a is further extended from a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed on a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 832 g for slidably mounting the ball pulling lever 844 up and down.

The payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 protrudes radially from the rear surface of the spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end so that it can be connected to the payout blade 839. ..

The payout blades 839 extend in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and project from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) front blades 839b and the plurality (three) of the front blades 839b project from the rear end of the base cylinder 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be staggered. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a in a tubular shape and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. It is equipped with 839d.

The front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c of the payout blades 839 are provided with three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c rotate with respect to the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset in the direction at an angle of 60 degrees and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumferences of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0, which is the outer diameter of the game ball. It is said to be four times.

Therefore, the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) can hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball. it can. In other words, it can accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the payout device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blades 839 are arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at locations where the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, at the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It cannot be discharged from the outlets 831b and 832b downward. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball accommodating portion 839e makes the diameter D1 1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated at high speed, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions, and the lower part is bent to form a front-viewing shape, and the main body portion 843a and the upper end of the main body portion 843a extend in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction. A barrel portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape, and a main body portion 843a. It is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 105), which is formed of a through hole penetrating back and forth at a lower portion that is bent in a box shape.

In the state where the payout device 830 is assembled, the ball pulling movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left in the front view, and the upper end shaft tube part 843b pays out the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, the rotation is possible at a portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the outlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side of the front view slightly above the portion that bends downward. It is attached to.

In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment has the ball pulling lever 844 slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 hits the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843 from the right side when viewed from the front. I'm in contact. As a result, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105 (a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent part, and the lower side of the bent part is diagonally lower left in front view. Extends to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball pulling movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left side forms a part of the wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

The ball pulling movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball pulling movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the front view of the vertical line passing through the center of the barrel portion 843b under a normal state, and its own weight. Although a force is acting to rotate the ball counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the normal state is maintained because the rotation to the counterclockwise direction is restricted by the ball pulling lever 844.

When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The regulation of movement is lifted. Therefore, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the barrel portion 843b. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). As a result, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are circulated and discharged downward from the ball pulling outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball pulling movable piece 843 is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward by screwing a weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is lifted, the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball-pulling movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, and the dust can be removed. It is possible to prevent the ball-extracting movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d which is a through hole and mounted, even if the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be pulled out and the ball pulling movable piece 843. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight mounting portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-extracting movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. It is possible to reduce the cost related to.

By the way, when the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball pulling movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball pulling movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, resulting in a ball. The pull-out movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a is brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843, the ball pulling passage 831e is provided by the ball pulling movable piece 843. , 832e is closed, and when the ball pulling lever 844 to release the closing is slid upward to unlock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes The ball pulling movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball pulling lever 844 is operated to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the ball pulling movable piece 843 can rotate satisfactorily, so that the game ball can be pulled out reliably. , Workability at the time of maintenance etc. can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 at a position below the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and is attached to the rear side of the box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with the rear side open, and the front side is open. It includes a box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a payout device pressing member 853 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and can press the payout device 830 upward.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that opens upward so that a game ball can pass through a portion on the left side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and is formed between the upper ball outlet 850b, which is open upward so that the game ball can pass through. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size through which game balls flow, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a portion directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage. The full tank discharge port 850e, which is open downward at the lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, and the upper ball storage passage which protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. It is provided with a partition section 850f that partitions the lower part of the 850c to the left and right.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper ball pulling passage 850 g that guides the game ball that has entered from the upper ball pulling entrance 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball pulling passage 850 g. It is equipped with a ball removal outlet 850h. In the upper full tank path unit 850, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h are arranged in this order and open downward from the left side in front view. Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 is provided with a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly under the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper ball ejection port 850b. Is located directly below the ball ejection ports 831c and 832c of the payout device 830. Further, in a state where the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball ejection port 850h are the normal taxiways of the lower full tank path unit 860. Each of the 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball removal taxiway 865 is opened directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that are discharged by the payout device 830 and are discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, the door frame 3 is normally released. The exit 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition section 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition section 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full taxiway unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full taxiway unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 normal taxiway 861. And a full taxiway 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3, and usually The taxiway opening and closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the taxiway opening and closing door 863 are the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. It is provided with a closing spring 864, which is urged to close the front end opening of the door.

Further, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and is above the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900 from the central right end in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a lower ball removal taxiway 865 that discharges to.

In the lower full tank taxiway unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in the front view. The rear ends of the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are open upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. As shown in the figure, the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotatably attached in the front-view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864. Being urged. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full taxiway unit 860, the full taxiway 862, which opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal taxiway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is normally attached to the lower side of the taxiway 861 and at the position on the left side of the full taxiway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-shaped base 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate 863b that extends diagonally to the upper left from the base 863a and can close the front end opening of the taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c that extends from the base portion 863a to the right in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the full taxiway 862, and an extension portion 863d that extends diagonally from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. The extension portion 863d is provided with an actuating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip portion and is capable of contacting the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass through. The actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base portion 863a in a front view, and is inclined so that the front end surface protrudes forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is urged from the lower side of the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a projecting forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

The lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has the pachinko machine 1 assembled, and the front end thereof is the through ball passage 273, the full tank socket 274, and the door opening / closing contact in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is mounted at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 does not come into contact with the operating protrusion 863e. Therefore, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 has an urging force of the closing spring 864. The second door plate portion 863c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (A). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway are guided. The game ball will not spill from the road 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 and operates. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force that tends to rotate the taxiway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front acts against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 is opened (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full taxiway 862. ..

In the state where the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full tank are filled. The through ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, and penetrate from the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 side. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are opened by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the taxiway is opened and closed, the operating range of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls are released from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game balls cannot be supplied to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates due to the game ball being stored in the storage passage 277 and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full with the game ball. Is notified, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is canceled.

It should be noted that the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In this state, the number of storage passages 277 on the upstream side, the full taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 can be filled. When the game ball is paid out, the payout device 830 may stop paying out the game ball. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with a game ball, and it is possible to dedicate the player to the jackpot game and entertain it.

[4-7. Board unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass inside which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are housed therein. It includes a payout control board box 950.

The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510, and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 117 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 shows the game board of FIG. 117. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that a game ball driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a grand prize opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit, which is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a gate portion 2003 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. In the security recess 1008, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned from the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116, 118 and 119 and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or a front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , Is equipped. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a as in the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through-hole 1122 that penetrates into the.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120. It is almost the same surface as the front surface. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and is forward from the front of the holding step 1121. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engaging step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engaging piece 1125 is on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It extends by a predetermined amount toward the center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claw 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is connected to the front component 1000. The 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guidance unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 of the embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 117, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 121 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower end in the front view, and is opened downward to have a notch portion 1152 having the same shape as the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000 and a notch portion 1152 above the notch portion 1152 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and rear positions where the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000. It is provided with a fixing hole 1154. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel is connected to the front component 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for mounting the table unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 120). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 120, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls to the first starting port 2002. To the number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that display the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. When the second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the big winning opening 2005 It mainly includes a round display 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 116. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 116. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. Two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted into the back box 3010 from diagonally rearward, and then the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a grand prize opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit, which is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to a substantially central portion in the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 opens a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6) It extends to the left and right with an acceptable size, and is formed so that it can be opened and closed according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 capable of always accepting game balls.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in the game area 5a from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. The 2300 on the side unit is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). Can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of.

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is located in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. The start port unit 2100 is arranged directly under the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received by the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending to the left and right along the above and houses the effect drive board.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

As the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, and the like are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the striking force can be. , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right to be released forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that it is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted at the start port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), On the downstream side thereof, the area provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 will flow down.

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it will be in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation hit", "time reduction hit", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and " There are "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the large prize opening 2005 when the large prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls, by having the large winning opening 2005 accept the game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where a game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is made by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the symbols correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery drawn.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 is displayed according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is the present invention. The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is attached to the bulging portion of the present invention of the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative part of the present invention, and the first button decorative part 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative part of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are used as the second decorative body of the present invention in the present embodiment. The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention, respectively. ..

Further, each LED and subscreen decorative board mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 in the present embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is used as the light emitting body of the present invention, and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present invention is used as the back decoration means of the present invention. The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A). 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlapped with each other. Since it is possible to show the player a decorative decoration with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Further, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). At the same time, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the operation of the player, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move the button lens 411. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) come close to each other or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a due to a change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the subscreen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the decorative portion 432g inside the button (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) with the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be changed. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) inside the operation button, it is referred to as the first decorative body. Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the second decorative body, the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will be significantly different, and the button lens 411 will be operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the player is not in the state, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the crossing mode (overlapping condition) with and is changed, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side of the button lens 411 not provided with the first button decoration portion 411a. The decorative member 432 inside the operation button on the back side (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side can be visually recognized well, and the first button decoration portion 411a is radial. The decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame inside the operation button is passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. It is possible to strongly direct the player's attention to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432 g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 when viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g The perspective of the decoration can be surely exhibited, and the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. it can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432 g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432 g. By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

Further, each LED (or subscreen decorative board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436. When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) inside the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the light emitting decoration can also entertain the player. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button are on. While the interior decoration board 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are light-emitting and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED477a), the first button decoration unit 411a is decorated with the second button inside. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for light emission decoration, whereas the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminescent and decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emitting decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. (Or, when the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a emitted, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the player's attention can be obtained.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door) are arranged. It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move on the outer side of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame) inside the operation button are not required. The second effect display device on the side (460A) can be expanded outward to make it as large as possible, and the size can be increased so that the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device on the door frame side) can be enlarged. 460A) can be made to stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 on the outside portion of the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal, which can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent some players from becoming frustrated and deteriorating their interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, below the through hole 111. The outer diameter is 10 cm on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side. The operation button 410, which is movable (advance / retreat) by the player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within the range of ~ 30 cm, and the operation button interior decoration that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, it is conventional. In the pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen at the position where the storage plate of the game ball stands out, so the player can see it at a glance. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is provided with a translucent second button decoration so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, which are provided with the part 411b and are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for luminescent decoration of the frame side lens 417. It includes an inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that separates the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that separates the second button decorative portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extending portion 413f, or the second LED 422b. , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently luminescent and decorated. it can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly luminescent and decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescent effect can be produced. In addition, various patterns of light emission can be produced by appropriately combining extinguishing, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated on the left outside of one operation button. Since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the second button decorative part Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away as possible from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diverted. The second button decorative portion 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is attached as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. The wiring connected to the right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button does not bend or extend, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b The luminous decoration can be entertained by the player without any problem, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration portion 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, by appropriately emitting light of the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparently. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-emitting decorated in various patterns, so that the player's interest can be focused on the operation button 410 and the operation button 410. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 is used by the player during the execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate the operation button 410, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type production), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Then, when the player participation type production is executed, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, since it is provided with a translucent main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that allow only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to be light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 413f of the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged behind by brightening the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411). It is possible to prevent the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitting decorated in a good state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect) can be displayed through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the inner tubular portion 416d is extended from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be completely separated from the portion 411b by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the decorative substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized in which the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go under the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light from the operation button 410 is completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411. Can be done. Therefore, the first LED 422a and 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a good state, and through the transparent button lens 411, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button is decorated in front of the outer portion of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decorative portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. At this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is light-emittingly decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (the second effect on the door frame side) is compared with the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the appearance of the player can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, a light emission effect in which the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and light emission in which the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 Since it is possible to show the player the effect, the light emission effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can not get bored with the various light emission effects, and the player can enjoy it. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is driven into the game area 5a by the stored game ball in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3. Along with mounting, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and below the upper plate 321 to attach a predetermined size of installation space behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is arranged from that portion. Since the portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 is extended to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing the game ball, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player. it can.

Further, at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate second region A2 extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends upward from the upper end of the mounting space 326j toward the remaining space side. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower plate 322 from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), which reduces the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball to the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from invading (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable when the game ball invades the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented. It is possible to suppress the decrease of.

Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate main body 325 on the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening). When a hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be done.

Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the vertical wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), reduce interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are used as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. This pachinko machine It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side in which 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to accept the game ball into the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, and the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. A storage plate capable of storing a game ball composed of a lower plate 322 and a lower plate 322 is provided, and the storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are placed outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. It has a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in a space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage dishes (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made small to be inconspicuous. it can. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) that stands out can be seen in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate are visible, so that the player can see the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power, which can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is open. Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Since the extension unit 325B, the second extension unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 in a range that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second area A2). it can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient storage amount of the game ball can be secured, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1, the lower plate covers 340, 340A having the lower plate second region A2, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. having different sizes are prepared in advance. By installing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, which are sized according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second) with different rearward protrusions. The lower plate 322 that can be used for the effect operation unit 400A) can be used, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward and is a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (mounting) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, which have shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, various forms can be supported. It is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game ball is placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where more game balls are loaded due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is located below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed such that a game ball is received in a general winning opening 2001 or the like. The lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction while having 321 and the lower plate 322. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, which is of interest to the player. It can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract. Further, since it is difficult for the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to visually recognize the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the player can play the game in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and distracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 that guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the cushioning portion 322d, the portion between the ball pulling hole 322a, the lower plate ball pulling hole 322a is left open. , The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a from the front, which is probable. In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 that can be seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 are brought into the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, and discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , It is possible to prevent the game ball from circulating in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to surely make the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is immediately noticed by the ball guide portion 322c or the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball is discharged downward (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 from the front, the lower plate can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice the visible size with respect to the size of 322, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls as in the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward below the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction. In addition to being provided with a portion 326a, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction is recessed on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 so as to be scooped backward. Due to the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a can be made to appear to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect) can be made to appear. The operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in a position where the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game ball is wrapped around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and the player can concentrate on the game, entertain the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, his / her fingertips are on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game ball is sufficiently secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game ball is stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322. Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decline in interest. Further, since the fingertips of the hands placed in the lower plate 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reassure the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), a sufficient storage amount of the game ball can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. It is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be provided. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player can enter the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertips and the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 and the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and injuring the player when the hand is put in. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be moved from the player side. It can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make it stand out more and attract the attention of the player, and the decoration by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is easy to see. Then, it is possible to entertain the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates vertically, it is a conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in the above, a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. You can play the game with a sense of humor, and you can dedicate the player to the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are arranged when viewed from the front. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer to improve the appearance, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 protruding forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. Door frame side effect display device 460 that can present effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of The operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the operation button is attached, and the outside is surrounded by the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 having a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412, and projects from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side first) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, or the like. (Ii) It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative member 432 provided inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player can improve the appearance. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between the lens and the 470) becomes relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative portion 411a or the like, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented from deteriorating the appearance. The 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strong. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts and has high appeal.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a tubular shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and invisible what is outside the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical body shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), it is near the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the advancing / retreating direction of the operation button 410. Since it is in an inclined state with respect to (a plane orthogonal to), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 are arranged. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player with the operation button 410. The 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be realized.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative property). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is made to stand out and is of interest to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button is formed at the portion of the button frame 412. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

In addition, a button frame 412 that is opaque from the outer peripheral end to the inside of the button lens 411 with a predetermined width over the entire circumference is provided, and the player cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button on the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the gap between the main body 413a and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and it is possible to secure a space for moving them. Can be moved well.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer circumference has no directionality as compared with the case of having a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410 when the player participates in the operation. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and reduces his interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest can be operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). In addition to being able to entertain the production, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410 by the production image and the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). , By actively participating the player in the player participation type production and entertaining it, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by executing the effect in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to immediately make the player recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and it is highly appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 raise expectations for the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachislot machine or a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration portion 411a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The button lens 411 in which the first button decorative portion 411a is not formed may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button is not attached to the button frame 412. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed in a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first) so as to surround the entire outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes in a tubular shape toward the two base units 450) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one of the display devices 460A may project toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire circumference of the outer circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have at least decoration (flat decoration by sticking a sticker, printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism, etc. on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) to the rear, and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). It may be set to 322, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of it wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You may be there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape (shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example of denting in a shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be dented in a polygonal prismatic shape or a polyhedral shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation dial, touch panel, etc." "Equipped with an operating device", "Equipped with a rotating body with a decoration on the surface", "A thing with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body", "Game Characters, items, logos, and decorations that imitate scenes (dioramas) in three dimensions according to the concept of the machine "," Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns according to the concept of the game machine , Etc. are decorated by seals, printing, etc. ”, etc., and members such as units or panels may be attached. Further, the member to be attached to the attachment space 326j (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is provided with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a which is open forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is not limited to, but is a dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. It is desirable that the front surface of such a dish unit cover be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the game machine by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion covers an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322. An example of covering the lower plate with difficulty in viewing from the front is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an area of less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction in an arc shape. The second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the rear member of the display device 460A or the like is shown so as to be always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is subject to predetermined conditions. A configuration having a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible by satisfying the above may be used. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side" and "a liquid crystal film that is transparent by turning the power on / off". The rear side can be seen by becoming opaque or opaque. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized. The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in the normal state can be seen, and thus the front member. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be made less bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under a normal state, the rear side of the front member is darkened to decorate only the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, when the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. The decoration by the surface of the can be shown to the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member, and the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and the front member and the rear member When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or, the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion of the LED or the like. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. As a result, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, and various decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. Therefore, on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as something like a magic mirror, but even if it is made like a liquid crystal film, the same effect can be obtained. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so that it can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or after. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or luminescent and decorated) by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of luminescent effects and decorative effects. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 128. FIG. 123 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 123, and FIG. 125 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from the terminal plate for renting a game ball or the like that relays an electrical connection with the display board. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 128 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 123, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly composed of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 951, the power supply board 931 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 123, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, and also performs the game operation. The detection signals from the main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in various control programs such as the main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or momentary voltage of a predetermined voltage. It is mainly equipped with a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of stoppage.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "main control built-in") that updates a big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is set in advance). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (1 value within a predetermined numerical range) as an initial value and is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function has the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 123, the first start port sensor 4002 for detecting the game ball entering the first start port 2002 and the second game ball for detecting the game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 114. The detection signal from the start port sensor 4004 and the general winning port sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball that has entered the general winning port 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the specified input port. Further, it is attached to the gate sensor 4003 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using magnets and the vibration detection sensor 4026 that detects fraudulent activity that affects the fall of the game ball by shaking or hitting the game machine are the detection signals of the game board. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , 2nd special symbol display 1405, 1st special hold number indicator 1404, 2nd special hold number indicator 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407. To do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 do not frequently detect the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201 in which the game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game production and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I / O ports, provides a bus 1310ah. The circuit is connected via (see FIG. 133). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. See 133). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec sends a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 129) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 124, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball displays the state of the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the operation switch 954 that also has various functions, and the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display 860b and the like are provided. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.) Is output.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 124, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in various control programs including a payout control program that controls operation, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. To output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 103. The payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 are provided. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program also issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to the external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball out detection sensor 827 that detects the out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full is full is first the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 bc without the reset function, thereby payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cc to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display. By outputting the drive signal for display on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). In When the number "3" is displayed, it means that the payout detection sensor error (specifically, the payout detection sensor 842 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). Is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photoIC) (not shown), and the amusement park (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls and various other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hall. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit 330. It is output to the equal rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental device return display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 129) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to a predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and is triggered by the payout control MPU952a from the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 cc without the reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards of the above is also relayed (to be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the lending balance display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

In the ball rental button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and one of these three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven by one digit segment indicator, which is a so-called dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball loan return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on are the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input via the plate 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the vessel can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends an EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball rental is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island facility and capable of electrically connecting or electrically disconnecting an AC 24 volt (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. A launch control unit 953 that controls launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power ratio of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improving circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. It includes a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly comprises a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not the player is touching or a finger, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The game ball received by the ball feeding member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. While performing drawing control of the peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the speaker 921 and the upper speaker A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") that holds a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 573, calendar information that specifies the date, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second. A control unit 4165 and a volume adjusting volume 1510a for adjusting the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob unit are provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emitting modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc. that defines the above, and various information that is continued over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot game states and special Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. It is described as.) And.

Peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power failure occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit game board side motor drive data for transmission to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 5. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400, and a pressure detection sensor 440 for detecting the pressing operation of the operation button 410. The detection signal from is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board. It is input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is adapted to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to independently transfer data between devices without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae with peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 1511ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are serial I / O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I / O ports for motor drive boards, serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier boards, and frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control. When this timer is up, it resets in hardware. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the watchdog timer is started and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.

As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are schedule data for sound generation that generates sound effects and the like, and schedule data for electrical drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is done is read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information in a range of 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information that is updated when various control programs are executed. Is provided.

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. And the game state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is a production information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a of "(1fr)" Since the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" is defined as "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the lamp drive board side. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap and the like are provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set. In the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are set. Dial created based on various information (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400) obtained by acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the above. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the effect display drive board 4450 is peripheral to the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511ca of Bank0 (1fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. To. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cc has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr), and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed, and are stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (see FIG. 143). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) While it can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is backed up in "(SRAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing the one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In addition, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source, various sound such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial to the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The converted drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320. A speaker IC 1512d for directing the door frame side to transmit, and a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is transmitted. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. I have. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b are used for displaying sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player's point of view. The service mode screen image data used for the above, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400 should be operated.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when the V blank signal described later is input, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to 1511cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 128 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display arranged in the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. Since the control board 1510 outputs the output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely long as compared with the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, "V-by-One (V-by-One) of THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential communication system called "registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a serial interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel system. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Image data for the effect display device 460 is stored from channel CH2 in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 effect display drive board 4450. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The built-in sound source VDP1512a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP1512a has music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 128. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of the sound source and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a include a plurality of sound source built-in VDP1512a built-in sound sources. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined to obtain the volume of the combined production sound. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the combined production sound volume is actually combined with the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified master volume value is amplified, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sound used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined and this The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound. The sound data of the track in which is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified production sound and the notification sound are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound proceeds according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period elapses, the sound is forcibly set to mute. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed. If the setting mode is entered and adjusted by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, the production is produced. Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted production sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It has come to start flowing again from.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 128, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b are for drawing on the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses the right side audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, which is not shown in the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 128, drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three image signals, a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronous signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is obtained from the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full-tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged as a unit in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility are integrated. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment that receives noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is not just a parallel wire provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential paired cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, Zain Electronics in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Even if the mechanism is less susceptible to noise by adopting the differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., the configuration with such hardware alone is due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise that has entered the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of 3, the channel of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the door frame side effect display device 460 can reliably display the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later. And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 3, various wirings such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. As a result, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 to remove various wirings, and then the door frame 3 is removed from the main body frame 4, so that the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained. This can be done, and if the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twist pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cables, one wire is red and the other wire is gray, and the harness that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is input as a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two differential signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, various serialized effects are generated. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to a door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 It can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") to convey the problem. (Please call a clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side production display device 1600 by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. ” By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in the present embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. Based on the effect, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be used to develop the effect. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Day, the New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program to produce the game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. Etc.), but the notification sound and the notification sound also flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and from the mute. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation portion 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and cases where the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume adjusting volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the production operation unit 400 You can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to increase the volume to the desired level, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, is waiting for a customer, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, he / she will be seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game will use the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 129. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GNDs) of the various substrates and the grounds (GNDs) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same grounds (GNDs).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is plugged into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 129, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. This synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V), and supplies it to the power factor improving circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the launching solenoid 682 and outputting it to the launching solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feed unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c from + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 which are in the forward direction by the diode PD0. Current flows toward and toward the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned from the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

Three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages, + 24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and are peripheral through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 130A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 130 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 128, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. The + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other substrates other than the main control substrate 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

In the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 are supplied via the payout control board 951, and the signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V are monitored. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 130 (b) via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative substrate of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier substrate 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared with the case of monitoring the voltage to be output, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. 131 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 132 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 133 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 129 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, and main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 123 and 129. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 131, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz in this embodiment)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 131, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first electrically removed from the ripple (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 131, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU1310a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are each negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 131, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to each of these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 123. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit in which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built into the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 951. The operation signal in which is HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 131, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal that is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the vibration detection sensor 4026, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 123, are Since it is not directly input to the main control board 1310, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 132, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitoring voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC 22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 132, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 become the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V when + 24V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 24V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 132, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24, MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided into +12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, by changing the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, the D type flip flop MIC22 releases the latch state when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, and determines the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is the same. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes, the state where the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal whose logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted is negative logic. Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal can be used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. No function The main control output circuit 1310cc outputs the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure warning signal, and outputs the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 132, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 132. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 124 on the payout control board 951 In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. By doing so, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 132. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 126 is shown. In the above, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 becomes Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22. There is no reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is paid out to the payout control board 951. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of the 951 and the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 131. In the RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 123 is received as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal without the reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 123. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and a main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs the main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is provided to the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 123 are displayed. The drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the above, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and transistors MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 131 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main frequency serial data from the shift register 1310aea, a main frequency serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19,200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 131 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal for the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 ensures that the data is received without any omission or omission.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on by turning on the transistor MTR50. Therefore, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Even if the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops due to a power failure or momentary power failure due to the electrical parallel connection, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be interrupted and to prevent the command from being missing, so that the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate missing commands immediately after a power failure occurs or during a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. Therefore, 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a function, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and is missing. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 139. FIG. 134 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control unit and the like, FIG. 135 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 136 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 135, and FIG. 137 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 138 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 138 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 139 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 134, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly comprises the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each of them, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 to be smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. If a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 will cause a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples by the capacitor PC3 and smoothed. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the positive end of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a result, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the payout control MPU952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB.

[10-2. Payout control circuit]
In addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 resets as peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
The + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 as shown in FIG. 134. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are each negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 134, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 124, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the door frame 3 released from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 by the pull-up resistor PR20 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via a resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. The circuit is configured to have a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF according to the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. To. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input]
The main body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the main body frame 4 released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 by the pull-up resistor PR28 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via a resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 123 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, and the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off to perform logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, either one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer is based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that the player who is playing the door has a state that does not occur during the normal game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is in a state of being released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619'are adopted as normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR42, and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the + 12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a, while When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is transmitted through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after removing the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is changed, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, the accommodation space is filled with the stored game balls. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board. When the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side in 951 and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball burnout detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball-out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball passage described above by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 834, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body breaks down. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the 4th terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. When the first-stage and second-stage transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the second-stage transistor PTR43 changes, and the signal becomes the RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 131 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeat ON / OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the latter stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56 and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time and the error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). In the function of canceling the error in), it becomes an error clearing signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is turned on, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clearing for erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44 when the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the PTR42 is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is being operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 137, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded (GND). It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to and input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is supplied to the discharge motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals 6 and 7 of the drive ICPIC60 are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. A payout motor drive signal is input to a certain terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 125 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 includes the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal, via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 125 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 connects to the game ball rental device. An XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the loaned ball is possible or impossible via the terminal board 869. And output. As shown in FIG. 138, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LED and phototransistor are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and is also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 134 via the ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is changed, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as the CR connection signal 1.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, so that the transistor PTR70 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. To.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, so that the transistor PTR71 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 931. To.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 931. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo is taken. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, so that the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 bc to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXE output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 kb is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. In, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 134, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to the signals 1 and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 124 may be input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 124 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 139.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the payout control board 951 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal related to the above, a payout power failure warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal. A game information signal such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer has the number of jackpots in which the round is 2 times (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots in which 15 rounds have occurred (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of jackpots occur. In some cases, the 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily arouse the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. Absent.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 comprises an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the information output signal during probability fluctuation, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is obtained every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to that effect, and the main prize ball number information output signals are various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on the game ball entered in, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal generates a 15-round jackpot. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the signal is being displayed, and the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal indicating that the variation display is finished (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, and the starting port winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. This is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 140, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is provided in green to output an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. This is a signal to convey that, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in the present embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to count the number of times to perform the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the start port 2004, and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times that the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input and grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has received a 15-round jackpot.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input and grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer is the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is colored in red to output a time-saving and medium-time information output signal. As described above, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. At the same time, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time saving and to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during the probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during the probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during the probability fluctuation is input. In addition to being able to grasp that there is, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the ball has reached 10, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball entered in various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to be output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having the connector provided in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the left side of the center to the right side, in this respect as well, the wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and the various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If a big hit of 15 rounds happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining number is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, in the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each case, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. A clerk in the hall, for example, checks a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying a game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball clogging (also occurs in the payout device 830, for example). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball hose) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working, the game is being played by the main control board 1310, so after the 15 rounds of big hits are completed, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall. When the game returns to the above state, the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in the period when the 15-round big hit is completed and the 15-round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify each time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 as prize balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. Therefore, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1. The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are displayed. Through this, we adopted a mechanism to convey information to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the number of game balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 141. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 141 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 141, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly comprises the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 128 by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 together with the positive signal. It is possible to separate noise from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It restores to three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before serialization). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are 8 bits each. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two differential signals, the positive signal and the negative signal, are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuits so as to do so. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , The peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 and the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to the ground, respectively.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logical) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, The door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, but for some reason, it is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a is a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. For the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal plate 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that tells that the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 terminal to the D17 terminal, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal are three video signals (18) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[Peripheral control board and motor drive board]
Next, an upper decorative drive substrate as an example of a modified embodiment in which the lamp drive substrate 4170 and the motor drive substrate 4180 shown in FIG. 126 are integrated will be described. FIG. 142 is a block diagram mainly showing a peripheral control board 1510 and an upper decorative drive board 4200. The upper decorative drive board 4200 that drives the drive source that drives the effect body (movable body for effect (not shown)) based on the peripheral control board 1510 that performs the effect control and the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510. Is electrically connected to and by a harness 5102 provided with connectors CN1 and CN2 at both ends. Further, five stepping motors 4300a to 4300e as drive sources for driving the movable body are movably connected to the upper decorative drive substrate 4200 through the connectors CN3 to CN7. In the following description, the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e are simply referred to as motor a, motor b, motor c, motor d, and motor e.

As shown in FIG. 142, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with peripheral serial data output means 1513 that outputs serial drive data to the upper decorative drive board 4200 through the harness 5102. In this example, the peripheral serial data output means 1513 is executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a (peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae) and the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127. It is composed of the motor and solenoid drive processing of step S1104.

As will be described later, the peripheral serial data output means 1513 is for determining the drive data for the motors a to e and whether the drive data is normally transmitted to the upper decorative drive board 4200 through the harness 5102. Outputs serial drive data including judgment information.

The serial drive data transmitted from the peripheral serial data output means 1513 is converted into parallel drive data and captured in the upper decorative drive board 4200, and the motors a to e as drive sources are respectively based on the captured parallel drive data. Driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 for passing a drive current (excitation current in this example) are provided in the vehicle.

Briefly, a driver circuit unit 4220 is provided corresponding to the motor a, a driver circuit unit 4222 is provided corresponding to the motor b, a driver circuit unit 4224 is provided corresponding to the motor c, and the motor d is provided. A driver circuit unit 4226 is provided correspondingly, and a driver circuit unit 4228 is provided corresponding to the motor e. The five driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 are daisy-chained with the driver circuit unit 4220 as the first stage and the driver circuit unit 4228 as the final stage for serial drive data.

Further, the upper decorative drive board 4200 is linked to an abnormal state of the harness 5102 for communicating and connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the upper decorative drive board 4200, or the connectors CN1 and CN2 to which the harness 5102 is connected, and the driver circuit. In order to make the state of units 4220 to 4220 a safe state, a safety circuit 4205 that inputs a predetermined safety signal to the driver circuit unit 4220 of the first stage and a signal line that propagates serial drive data are signaled for a predetermined period of time. A monitoring circuit 4230 is provided which monitors whether or not there is a signal and simultaneously gives an abnormality detection signal to the respective driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 when there is no signal for a certain period of time. The driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 cut off the drive current to the drive source when an abnormality detection signal is given.

Further, the upper decorative drive board 4200 detects each sensor (not shown) that detects the origin positions of a plurality of drive sources (motors a to e) on the peripheral control board 1510 through the harness 5102 instead of the drive data. It has a drive serial data output means 4250 that outputs information in addition to the determination information included in the serial drive data output by the peripheral serial data output means 1513. As shown in FIG. 142, the final stage driver circuit unit 4228 connected in a daisy chain is communicated with the drive serial data output means 4250.

[Circuit of upper decorative drive board]
143 to 147 are circuit diagrams showing circuits arranged on the upper decorative drive board 4200. As shown in FIG. 142, operating power supplies + 5V, + 12V, + 24V, and GND as a ground potential are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decorative drive board 4200 through the harness 5102 and the connector CN2, respectively.

Further, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decorative drive board 4200, serialized LED lighting data STLED-1, STLED-2, STLED-5, STLED-6, STLED-7, STLED through the harness 5102 and the connector CN2. -8 is transmitted, relayed by the upper decorative drive board 4200, and transmitted to the LED board (not shown).

Further, the serialized lamp clock signal PL-SCK2 and the lamp drive data PL-TXD2 are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration drive board 4200 through the harness 5102 and the connector CN2, and are transmitted to the upper decoration drive board 4200. Is to be received.

Further, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decorative drive board 4200, serialized motor excitation data M-TXD, motor clock signal M-SCK, and excitation data as serial data are converted into parallel data through the harness 5102 and the connector CN2. The motor latch signal M-TTRG and the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG for conversion are transmitted and received by the upper decorative drive board 4200.

Further, the determination information for determining whether the serial signal is normally transmitted from the upper decorative drive substrate 4200 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the origin detection sensor for detecting the origin position of each of the motors 4300a to 4300e ( The detection information (H, L) of the photosensor) is serialized into one, transmitted as the motor judgment information data M-RXD, and the detection information SIN1 of the effect gate switch (not shown) is also transmitted. ing.

In this embodiment, communication (various data and various signals) between the peripheral control board 1510 and the upper decorative drive board 4200 is performed by CMOS (CMOS IC 4210 shown in FIG. 145). Since these are electrical signals, in order to withstand noise, connect a resistor to which a predetermined voltage is applied to one end of the signal line and a ground resistor in the front stage before CMOSIC 4210 (reception means), and pass a current through the signal line. The noise resistance is improved.

Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 143, the other end of the resistor DR1 to which + 5 V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line of the lamp clock signal PL-SCK2, and the lamp clock signal PL- The other end of the resistor DR3 whose one end is grounded is connected to the signal line of the SCK2. A series resistor DR5 is connected to the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor DR3 of the signal line of the lamp clock signal PL-SCK2, and a capacitor DC1 having one end grounded is connected to the latter stage of the series resistor DR5, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor DC1. The lamp clock signal PL-SCK2'is set.

Further, the other end of the resistor DR2 to which + 5V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line of the lamp drive data PL-TXD2, and one end is grounded to the signal line of the lamp drive data PL-TXD2. The other end of the DR4 is connected. A series resistor DR6 is connected to the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor DR4 of the signal line of the lamp drive data PL-TXD2, and a capacitor DC2 having one end grounded is connected to the latter stage of the series resistor DR6, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor DC2. It is said that the lamp drive data is PL-TXD2'.

As shown in FIG. 144, the other end of the resistor DR7 to which + 5 V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line of the motor excitation data M-TXD, and one end is connected to the signal line of the motor excitation data M-TXD. Is connected to the other end of the grounded resistor DR11. A series resistor DR15 is connected to the rear stage of the connection point of the resistor DR11 of the signal line of the motor excitation data M-TXD, and a capacitor DC3 with one end grounded is connected to the rear stage of the series resistor DR15, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor DC3. It is said that the motor excitation data is M-TXD'.

The other end of the resistor DR8 to which + 5V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line of the motor clock signal M-SCK, and the signal line of the resistor DR12 having one end grounded is connected to the signal line of the motor clock signal M-SCK. The other end is connected. A series resistor DR16 is connected to the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor DR12 of the signal line of the motor clock signal M-SCK, and a capacitor DC4 having one end grounded is connected to the latter stage of the series resistor DR16, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor DC4. It is said that the motor clock signal is M-SCK'.

The other end of the resistor DR9 to which + 5V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line of the motor latch signal M-TTRG, and the signal line of the motor latch signal M-TTRG is connected to the signal line of the resistor DR13 having one end grounded. The other end is connected. A series resistor DR17 is connected to the rear stage of the connection point of the resistor DR13 of the signal line of the motor latch signal M-TTRG, and a capacitor DC5 having one end grounded is connected to the rear stage of the series resistor DR17, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor DC5. It is said that the motor latch signal is M-TTRG'.

The other end of the resistor DR10 to which + 5V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG, and the signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG has one end grounded. The other end of the DR 14 is connected. A series resistor DR18 is connected to the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor DR14 of the signal line of the feedback data latch signal signal M-RTRG, and a capacitor DC6 having one end grounded is connected to the latter stage of the series resistor DR18, and rippled by the capacitor DC6. Is removed as the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG'.

Lamp clock signal PL-SCK2 signal line, lamp drive data PL-TXD signal line, motor excitation data M-TXD signal line, motor clock signal M-SCK signal line, motor latch signal M-TTRG signal line and The logic of the signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG is HI when there is a signal output or data transmission from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the signal line of the lamp clock signal PL-SCK2, the signal line of the lamp drive data PL-TXD, the signal line of the motor excitation data M-TXD, the signal line of the motor clock signal M-SCK, and the signal of the motor latch signal M-TTRG. Line and feedback The logic of the signal line of the data latch signal M-RTRG is LOW when there is no signal output or data transmission from the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 transmits these data to the upper decorative drive board 4200 at predetermined cycles (for example, every 1 ms).

[CMOSIC4210]
As shown in FIG. 145, the CMOS IC 4210 is a Schmitt trigger buffer, and is a power supply terminal Vcc, input terminals A1 to A8, output terminals Y1 to Y8 corresponding to input terminals A1 to A8, ground terminal GND, selection terminal CONT, and control terminal. It has / G.

An operating voltage of + 5V is supplied to the power supply terminal Vcc, the ground terminal GND is grounded, and the control terminal / G is also grounded so that operation is possible. Further, + 5V (H) is applied to the selection terminal CONT, and the buffer type is set. The CMOSIC 4210 has two thresholds for the input signals input to the input terminals A1 to A8. For example, in this example, since the operating voltage is + 5V, the high potential threshold is 3.15V and the low potential threshold. Is 1.35V.

The input terminals A1 to A8 of the CMOS IC 4210 output the potential of the logical H (active signal) from the output terminals Y1 to Y8 when the potential of the input signal exceeds a high threshold value, and conversely, the potential of the input signal is low. When the value falls below the threshold value, the potential of the logic L (negative signal) is output from the output terminals Y1 to Y8. When the input signal is between the low and high thresholds, the previous output potential is retained.

As shown in FIG. 145, the motor excitation data M-TXD'is input to the input terminal A1 of the CMOS IC 4210, the motor clock signal M-SCK' is input to the input terminal A2, and the motor latch signal M is input to the input terminal A3. -TTRG'is input, and the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG' is input to the input terminal A4.

Further, the lamp clock signal PL-SCK2'is input to the input terminal A5 of the CMOSIC 4210, the lamp drive data PL-TXD2'is input to the input terminal A6, and the effect gate switch (not shown) is input to the input terminal A7. The detection information SIN1 is input, and the input terminal A8 contains one detection information (H, L) of the origin detection sensor (photosensor) for detecting the origin position of each motor 4300a to 4300e and one determination information described later. The serialized transmission data SEN-SER is input to.

A series resistor DR19 is connected to the output terminal Y5 of the CMOS IC4210 to be a lamp clock output signal PL SCK2 OUT, and a series resistor DR20 is connected to the output terminal Y6 to be a lamp drive output data PL TXD2 OUT. It is transmitted to the lamp board (not shown).

Further, the detection information SIN1 of the effect gate switch output from the output terminal Y7 of the CMOS IC 4210 is transmitted from the connector CN2 (see FIG. 143) to the peripheral control board 1510 through the harness 5102 via a series resistor (not shown). Further, from the output terminal Y8 of the CMOS IC 4210, the detection information (H, L) of the origin detection sensor (photosensor) for detecting the origin position of each motor 4300a to 4300e and the determination information described later are serialized into one. It is output as transmission data M-RXD, and is transmitted from the connector CN2 (see FIG. 143) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the harness 5102 via a series resistor (not shown).

[Disconnection of signal line of harness and safety circuit 4205]
If the signal line of the harness 5102 related to the above-mentioned lamp or motor is broken, no signal is input. In this case, if the potential of the input signal input to the input terminals A1 to A6 of the CMOS IC 4210 is an intermediate potential between a high threshold value and a low threshold value, the output may hold the immediately preceding potential and may be indefinite. Yes, it causes malfunction.

The safety circuit 4205 previously shown in FIG. 142 is linked to the abnormal state of the harness 5102 or the connector CN2 to which the harness 5102 is connected, and is connected in a daisy chain so as to make the state of the driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 safe. A predetermined safety signal is input to the driver circuit unit 4220 of the first stage of the above.

Specifically, the safety circuit 4205 gives an active signal in which the logic is active to the driver circuit unit 4220 when a signal is placed on the signal line, and the logic is active in the driver circuit unit 4220 when the signal is not placed on the signal line. It is composed of a signal setting circuit that is set to give a negative signal that is not.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the signal setting circuit, the logic H is given to the driver circuit unit 4220 when the signal is on the signal line, and the logic L is given to the driver circuit unit 4220 when the signal is not on the signal line. The set resistance circuit is adopted.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid malfunction due to the potential of the input signals input to the input terminals A1 to A6, as a specific example, the above-mentioned resistors DR1 and DR2 (FIG. 143) and DR7 to DR10 (FIG. 144) The resistance value of the above is 4.7 kΩ, and the resistance values of the resistors DR3, DR4 (FIG. 143) and DR11 to DR14 (FIG. 144) are 1.3 kΩ. That is, the ratio of the resistance values (sometimes called a multiplier) is set so that the input to the driver IC in the subsequent stage becomes a logic L (negative signal).

By the way, when the signal line of the harness 5102 is broken, the input voltage of this embodiment is calculated as (1.3 kΩ / 4.7 kΩ + 1.3 kΩ) × 5 V = 1.08 V, which is the threshold value of the low potential of the CMOS IC 4210. The potential is lower than 1.35V. Therefore, the output of the CMOS IC 4210 is logic L, and the input logic to the driver IC in the subsequent stage is L (negative signal). Therefore, malfunction can be reduced.

[Output related to the motor from CMOSIC4210]
The motor excitation data M TXD is output from the output terminal Y1 of the CMOS IC 4210, the motor clock signal M SCK is output from the output terminal Y2, and the motor latch signal M TTRG is output from the output terminal Y3.

The motor excitation data M TXD, the motor clock signal M SCK, and the motor latch signal MTTRG are provided one by one (five in total) corresponding to each of the five motors 4300a to 4300e in FIG. 142 in FIGS. 146 to 147. It is connected so as to be input to the indicated driver ICs 4220, 4222, 4224, 4226, 4228. Further, the feedback data latch signal MRTRG is output from the output terminal Y4, and the feedback data latch signal MRTRG is input to the parallel / serial IC 4250 of FIG. 147.

[Circuit operation monitoring function]
If the signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is not normally transmitted to the driver ICs 4220, 4222, 4224, 4226, 4228 due to the disconnection of the harness 5102 or the damage of the CMOS IC 4210, the problem that the current continues to flow to the drive source occurs. There is a risk of

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, a monitoring circuit 4230 for monitoring whether the circuit is operating normally is provided. The monitoring circuit 4230 includes a resistor DR21 (for example, 10 kΩ in this example) to which + 5 V is applied to one end, and a capacitor DC7 (in this example) in which one end is grounded and the other end is connected in series to the other end of the resistor DR21. For example, it is composed of an RC series circuit (time constant setting circuit) consisting of 10 μF) and an IC 4232.

The IC4232 is a monostaple multivibrator having CMOS inside, and has a power supply terminal Vcc, a ground terminal GND, an input terminal 1 / A, an input terminal 1B, an input terminal / 1CLR, and a potential input terminal 1RX / CX. It has a gate terminal 1CX and an output terminal 1 / Q.

An operating power supply of + 5V is supplied to the power supply terminal Vcc of the IC4232, and the ground terminal GND is grounded. + 5V is applied to the input terminal / 1CLR and is held at the H level. Input terminals 1 / A are grounded and maintained at L level. The gate terminal 1CX is grounded, the potential input terminal 1RX / CX is connected to the connection point between the resistor DR21 and the capacitor DC7, and a potential that changes depending on the time constant of the RC series circuit is applied between the gate terminal 1CX. ..

The input terminal 1B is connected in the middle of the signal line of the motor clock signal M SCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210, and the motor clock signal M SCK (for example, the rise period is 986 ns) is input. There is. A resistor DR22 whose one end is grounded is connected to the signal line from the output terminals 1 / Q, and the driver ICs 4220 to FIG. 147 to FIG. 147, which constitute each of the driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 shown in FIG. 142. It is connected to each nEBL terminal of 4228.

The operation of the monitoring circuit 4230 is such that when the rising edge of the motor clock signal MSCK input to the input terminal 1B of the IC 4232 is input, the IC 4232 is triggered, the discharge of the capacitor DC7 is started, and the potential of the potential input terminal 1RX / CX is started. However, when the voltage drops to the internal low-level reference voltage, the capacitor DC7 is charged with a time constant determined by the resistor DR21 and the capacitor DC7, and the potential of the potential input terminal 1RX / CX starts to rise.

On the other hand, the output of the output terminals 1 / Q becomes the HI level when a trigger is given. When the potential of the potential input terminal 1RX / CX reaches the internal high level reference voltage, the output of the output terminal 1 / Q returns to the LOW level.

On the other hand, if the waveform of the motor clock signal MSCK does not change for a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 ms in this example) due to, for example, disconnection of the harness 5102 or damage to the CMOS IC 4210, the logic of the input terminal 1B of the IC 4232 is changed. It remains stuck to L and the IC4232 does not accept the trigger. Therefore, the output of the output terminal 1 / Q of the IC 4232 remains at the LOW level. That is, the enable signal MOT ENA (abnormality detection signal) of the logic L is output, and the abnormality detection signal is input to each nEBL terminal of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228. Then, the gate of the internal drive circuit portion of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 is closed, and the drive current (excitation current) flowing through each of the OUT1 terminals to OUT4 terminals is internally cut off.

As a result, for example, it is possible to solve the problem that the current continues to flow in the drive source. In addition, it is possible to prevent smoke and ignition by keeping the current flowing through the drive source.

In the above embodiment, the input terminal 1B is connected in the middle of the signal line of the motor clock signal M SCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210, and the motor clock signal M SCK (as an example, the rise period is 986 ns) is input. However, it does not have to be the motor clock signal M SCK. Instead, the input terminal 1B is the motor excitation data M TXD (an example of serial drive data) output from the output terminal Y1 of the CMOS IC 4210. ) Is connected in the middle of the signal line, and the motor excitation data MTXD (for example, the data transmission cycle is every 1 ms) may be input.

[Driver IC and parallel / serial IC]
In this example, assuming that the driver circuit units 4220 to 4228 shown in FIG. 142 are specifically configured, as shown in FIGS. 146 to 147, the motors a to motor e correspond to the motors a to motor e, respectively. The driver ICs 4220 to 4228 for driving are provided. The drivers ICs 4220 to 4228 have the same configuration, and have a shift register function and a drive circuit function. Therefore, here, the drive IC 4220 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the drivers IC 4222 to 4228 will be omitted.

The drive IC4220 has a clock terminal SCLK, an exciting data input terminal SDATIN, a latch terminal LATCH, an enable terminal nEBL, an exciting data output terminal SDATOUT, a reset terminal RESET, a ground terminal GND, a power supply terminal VM, a VCLANP terminal, and an exciting coil connection terminal OUT1, OUT2. , OUT3 and OUT4.

The motor clock signal M SCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210 is input to the clock terminal SCLK of the drive IC 4220. The serialized motor excitation data M TXD output from the output terminal Y1 of the CMOS IC 4210 is input bit by bit to the excitation data input terminal SDATIN. The motor latch signal MTTRG output from the output terminal Y3 of the CMOS IC 4210 is input to the latch terminal LATCH.

The enable terminal nEBL of the drive IC 4220 is connected to the output terminal 1 / Q of the IC 4232 of the monitoring circuit 4230, and when the enable signal MOT ENA (abnormality detection signal) is output from the output terminal 1 / Q, each of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 It is input to the nEBL terminal, the gate of the drive circuit section inside the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 is closed, and the exciting current flowing through each OUT1 terminal to OUT4 terminal is internally cut off.

The excitation data output terminal SDATOUT of the drive IC 4220 is connected to the excitation data input terminal SDATIN of the drive IC 4222 in the next stage, and the serialized motor excitation data M TXD is shifted bit by bit and output.

The reset terminal RESET and ground terminal GND of the drive IC4220 are grounded, and the motor power supply + 24V is supplied to the power supply terminal VM of the drive IC4220. The cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD2 is connected to the VCLANP terminal of the drive IC4220, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD2 and the + 24V supply line are connected via a fuse FUSE. Then, the power supply + 24V of the motor a (stepping motor 4300a) is supplied from the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD2.

The exciting coil connection terminal OUT1 of the drive IC4220 is connected to the A-phase coil of the motor a, the exciting coil connection terminal OUT2 is connected to the B-phase coil of the motor b, and the exciting coil connection terminal OUT3 is connected to the / A-phase coil of the motor b. The exciting coil connection terminal OUT4 is connected to the / B phase coil of the motor b, and the exciting current is switched for each phase (A, B, / A, / B) of the motor a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 147, the excitation data output terminal SDATOUT of the fifth-stage drive IC 4228 is connected to the input terminal A of the parallel / serial IC 4250 in the subsequent stage, and the serialized motor excitation data M TXD is generated bit by bit. It is shifted and output.

FIG. 148 (A) is a diagram showing the excitation data of the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e in a tabular format, and FIG. 148 (B) is a timing chart of the excitation data serially transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decorative drive board 4200. , FIG. 148 (C) is a diagram showing the order of the excitation phases of the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e in a table format.

In this example, the excitation data of one stepping motor 4300 is composed of 4 bits of A phase, B phase, / A phase, and / B phase, and the excitation data of 5 of the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e is 20. Become a bit. The excitation data is composed of 8 bits of D0 to D7, and it is determined whether or not the serial signal can be normally transmitted to the last 4 bits, that is, H-4 to H-1 of V-3. Judgment information for is stored. In the case of this example, the excitation data serially transmitted is 24 bits including the determination information.

The serial data transmission order is (V-3, H-1), (V-3, H-2), (V-3, H-3), (V-3, H-4), (V-3). , H-5), ..., (V-1, H-5), (V-1, H-6), (V-1, H-7), (V-1, H-8) Become. As described above, the excitation data is in the order of / B phase, / A phase, B phase, and A phase in the transmission order of each motor.

As shown in FIG. 148 (B), the peripheral control board 1510 on the transmitting side transmits 1-bit data at the falling edge of the clock signal SCK4. In the upper decorative drive board 4200 on the receiving side, the clock signal is described as the motor clock signal M-SCK (FIG. 143). 1-bit data (M-TXD) is definitely received at the rising edge of the motor clock signal M-SCK. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time after the final data transmission, the data is confirmed by the latch signal (T-TRG4). In the upper decorative drive board 4200 on the receiving side, the latch signal is described as M-TTRG (FIG. 143).

The transmission of drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 to the motor drive board (upper decorative drive board 4200) will be described later, but the periphery of FIG. 152 executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a at predetermined cycles (for example, every 1 ms). It is executed by the motor and solenoid processing in step S1104 in the control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 148 (C), when the stepping motor 4300 is rotated in the normal direction, the A phase and the B phase are excited (step 1), and then the A phase and the / B phase are excited (step 2). Next, the / A phase and / B phase are excited (step 3), then the B phase and / A phase are excited (step 4), and the process returns to step 1 to excite the A phase and the B phase. Repeat the cycle (two-phase excitation).

When the stepping motor 4300 is reversed, the steps are opposite to those in the case of normal rotation, and the B phase and / A phase are excited (step 4), and then the / A phase and / B phase are excited (step 3). ), Next, the A phase and / B phase are excited (step 2), the A phase and the B phase are excited (step 1), and then the process returns to step 4 to excite the B phase and / A phase. The cycle is repeated (two-phase excitation).

Returning to FIGS. 146 to 147, the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 and the parallel / serial IC 4250 are connected in a daisy chain connection with the driver IC 4220 as the front stage and the driver IC 4228 as the last stage, that is, a string connection. Further, the excitation data output terminal (daisy chain connection terminal) SDATOUT of the driver IC 4228 is connected to the input terminal A of the parallel / serial IC 4250k described later.

The drivers IC 4220 to 4228 take in the motor excitation data M TXD serially output from the CMOS IC 4210 bit by bit. That is, the motor excitation data M TXD is shifted to the latter stage by 1 bit when the motor clock signal M SCK falls, and the motor excitation data M TXD is fixed by 1 bit when the motor clock signal M SCK rises.

In this way, when the motor clock signal M SCK rises and falls 24 times, the serially output motor excitation data M TXD is sequentially output by 1 bit in the subsequent stage by daisy chain connection for the excitation data shown in FIG. 148 (A). As a result of the shift, the excitation data (4 bits) of the A phase, the B phase, the / A phase, and the / B phase of the motor a are determined in parallel in the driver IC 4220.

Further, the excitation data (4 bits) of the A phase, the B phase, the / A phase, and the / B phase of the motor b are determined in parallel on the driver IC 4222. Excitation data (4 bits) of the A phase, B phase, / A phase, and / B phase of the motor c are determined in parallel on the driver IC 4224. Excitation data (4 bits) of the A phase, B phase, / A phase, and / B phase of the motor d are determined in parallel on the driver IC 4226.

Excitation data (4 bits) of the A phase, B phase, / A phase, and / B phase of the motor e are determined in parallel on the driver IC 4228. Further, the determination information (1 bit) is input to the input terminal A of the parallel / serial IC 4250 four times and overwritten.

The determination information is fed back to the peripheral control board 1510 via the parallel / serial IC 4250. Then, as will be described later, the determination information fed back by the peripheral control board 1510 is determined, and whether or not serial communication is normally performed in the serial signal transmission path is checked.

Then, when the latch signal MTRG from the CMOS IC 4210 is input, that is, when the latch signal MTRG changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the drivers IC 4220 to 4228 use the parallel confirmed excitation data as the excitation signal, which is not shown in the built-in. Output to each drive circuit section.

The drive circuit unit switches the exciting current for each phase coil (A phase, B phase, / A phase, / B phase) of the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e shown in FIG. 142 based on the exciting signal. The exciting current flows from the ground terminal GND to the ground through any of the connection terminals OUT1 to OUT4 of the drive IC 4300.

[Reduction of driver IC damage]
By the way, at present, many driving components are mounted on a game machine, and in the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 connected in a daisy chain, if the upstream driver IC is damaged, the subsequent driver ICs will be used. There is a problem that it cannot be controlled. When the motor is driven at a temperature higher than the specified temperature, the motor is driven with the phenomenon that the resistance value of the coil of the motor becomes small (short mode). For example, when the resistance value of the motor is 50Ω, it drops to about 5Ω in the short mode. Since the power supply voltage (for example, + 24V) applied to the motor does not change, there is a problem that a large current flows in as the resistance becomes smaller.

If the driver IC is damaged due to a large current flowing into the driver IC connected in a daisy chain, the driver IC connected to the subsequent stage cannot be controlled, so motors other than the motor corresponding to the damaged driver IC cannot be controlled. become. This may cause a decrease in production and a secondary failure.

In FIG. 146, a large current flows from the + 24V supply line through the power supply terminal VM and from the VCLMP terminal through the Zener diode ZD. Therefore, by providing one fuse FUSE for each of the five driver ICs 4220 to 4228, when the motor is damaged in the short mode, the fuse FUSE is blown before the driver IC is damaged due to overcurrent. Set. As a result, damage to the driver IC can be reduced.

[Parallel / Serial IC]
As shown in FIG. 147, the parallel / serial IC 4250 is configured as a specific example of the drive serial output means 4250 shown in FIG. 142, and has serial input terminals SI, parallel input terminals A to H, and shift / load terminals. It includes S / L, clock terminal CK, CKINH terminal, power supply terminal Vcc, serial output terminal QH, and ground terminal GND.

+ 5V is supplied to the power supply terminal Vcc, and the ground terminal GND is grounded. Further, since the serial input terminal SI, the parallel input terminal H, and the CKINH terminal are not used, they are grounded and fixed at the L level. The motor clock MSCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210 is input to the clock terminal CK. The feedback data latch signal MRTRG output from the output terminal Y4 of the CMOS IC 4210 is input to the shift / load terminal S / L.

The parallel input terminal A is connected to the excitation data output terminal (daisy chain connection terminal) SDATOUT of the fifth stage (final stage) driver IC 4228. The signals of the origin position detection sensors of the motors a to e and the detection signals of the claw sensors (not shown) are input to the parallel input terminals B to G. The serial output terminal QH is connected to the input terminal A8 of the CMOS IC 4210 shown in FIG. 145.

When the feedback data latch signal MRTRG input to the shift / load terminal S / L drops from the HI level to the LOW level, the logic from the parallel input terminal G to the parallel input terminal A is sequentially converted into serial data and output. Output as serial data SEN SER from terminal QH.

FIG. 149 (A) is a diagram showing the serial data reception order in a table format, and FIG. 149 (B) is a reception timing chart of serial data transmitted from the upper decorative drive board 4200 to the peripheral control board 1510.

Triggered by the falling edge of the feedback data latch signal MRTRG, after a predetermined period, the data M-RXD is read at the rising edge of the clock signal MSCK, and the data M-RXD is shifted by 1 bit at the falling edge of the clock signal M SCK.

As shown in FIG. 149 (A), the data M-RXD received by the peripheral control board 1510 includes motor e-sensor information (bit 0), claw sensor information (bit 1), and motor d sensor information (bit 2). ), Motor c sensor information (bit 3), motor b sensor information (bit 4), motor a sensor information (bit 5), determination information (bit 6), and invalid data (bit 7). Then, these received information correspond to the information input to the G terminal to the A terminal of the parallel / serial IC 4250.

Although the acquisition of information data transmitted from the motor drive board (upper decorative drive board 4200) to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described later, FIG. 152, which is executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a at predetermined cycles (for example, every 1 ms). It is executed in the moving body information acquisition processing of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing of the above.

The peripheral control board 1510 needs to determine whether or not the feedback determination information is normally performed and whether or not serial communication is normally performed in the serial signal transmission line. Here, if the wiring for sending the determination information from the upper decorative drive board 4200 to the peripheral control board 1510 is provided exclusively, there is a problem that the wiring increases by that amount. However, as described above, the origin of each motor. Since the detection information and the judgment information are combined and transmitted as serial data, it is possible to check whether the serial communication is normally performed on the serial signal transmission line, and without increasing the wiring. Can be kept to a minimum.

Although the clock signal used for receiving data is described as M SCK, it is the same clock signal as the clock signal SCK 4 (FIG. 148) used for transmitting the transmission data to the upper decorative drive board 4200 that it has. Therefore, it is not necessary to have a separate clock signal. Further, although the 1-bit determination information is not particularly specified, either the HI level or the LOW level may be used, and the HI level and the LOW level are set each time the data M-TXD is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decorative drive board 4200. It may be alternated.

[Upper decorative drive board 4200 of this embodiment]
If the signal line of the harness 5102 related to the above-mentioned lamp or motor is broken, no signal is input. In this case, the potentials of the input signals input to the input terminals A1 to A6 of the CMOS IC 4210 are the resistance values of the resistors DR1 and DR2 (FIG. 143) and DR7 to DR10 (FIG. 144) described above, and the resistors DR3 and DR4 (FIG. 143). ), The ratio with the resistance value of DR11 to DR14 (FIG. 144) is set so that the signal input to the input terminals A1 to A6 of the CMOS IC 4210 becomes the logic L. Therefore, the outputs of the output terminals Y1 to Y6 corresponding to the input terminals A1 to A6 of the CMOS IC 4210 become the logic L.

Therefore, the logic of the signal input to the clock signal input terminal SCLK of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 in the subsequent stage, the serial excitation data input terminal SDATIN, and the latch terminal LATCH sticks to L. That is, the operation of the drivers IC 4220 to 4228 is stopped. Therefore, the exciting current does not flow through the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e.

Further, the monitoring circuit 4230 monitors the motor clock signal M SCK output from the output terminal Y2 of the CMOS IC 4210, and the waveform of the motor clock signal M SCK is predetermined for a predetermined period of time due to disconnection or the like (for example, in this example). If there is no change (100 ms), the IC4232 will not accept the trigger. Therefore, the output of the output terminals 1 / Q remains at the LOW level. That is, the enable signal MOT ENA (abnormality detection signal) is output, and the abnormality detection signal is input to each nEBL terminal of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228. Then, the gate of the internal drive circuit portion of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228 is closed, and the drive current (excitation current) flowing through each of the OUT1 terminals to OUT4 terminals is internally cut off. Therefore, the exciting current does not continue to flow in the stepping motors 4300a to 4300e.

Further, by providing one fuse FUSE for each of the five driver ICs 4220 to 4228, when the motor is damaged in the short mode, the fuse FUSE is blown before the driver IC is damaged due to overcurrent. It is set. Therefore, damage to the driver IC can be reduced.

In FIG. 146, it is assumed that the fuse FUSE is blown by heat due to a large current flowing through the fuse FUSE provided for the driver IC 4220. Since the fuse FUSE is set to blow before the driver IC 4220 is damaged by the overcurrent, the driver IC 4220 can avoid damage and operate normally.

On the other hand, the blown fuse FUSE means that the stepping motor a driven by the driver IC 4220 has failed. That is, the coil of the stepping motor a cannot be energized, the power is cut off, and the motor a does not operate. However, since the protected driver IC 4220 operates normally, it does not interfere with the operation of the subsequent drive ICs 4222 to 4228 connected in a daisy chain.

As described above, in this embodiment, by providing one fuse FUSE for each of the five driver ICs 4220 to 4228, if the motor is damaged in the short mode, one motor may fail and cannot operate. Even so, the five driver ICs 4220 to 4228 can operate normally. Therefore, other motors can be driven normally.

Since the judgment information is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration drive board 4200 and the judgment information is combined with the origin detection information of each motor and fed back as serial data, the peripheral control It is possible to check whether or not serial communication is normally performed on the serial signal transmission line on the board 1510, and it is possible to minimize the number of wiring without increasing the number of wires.

When the signal line of the feedback data latch signal M-RTRG of the harness 5102 is disconnected, the feedback data latch signal MRTRG that remains unchanged at the logic L is input to the shift / load terminal S / L of the parallel / serial IC 4250. To. In this case, since the feedback data latch signal MRTRG does not reach the HI level, the parallel / serial IC 4250 does not perform the shift operation and does not transmit the serial data. Since the determination information is not fed back to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data, it can be determined that the peripheral control board 1510 has an abnormality in serial communication in the serial signal transmission line. In this case, as an abnormality notification, for example, in the door frame top unit 570 shown in FIG. 1, each LED is lit in a predetermined mode (for example, 60 seconds), and voice (for example, "an abnormality has occurred in the transmission line". . ”).

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the motor clock signal M-SCK to the upper decoration drive board 4200, and the upper decoration drive board 4200 uses the motor clock signal M-SCK to capture serial drive data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the clock signal generation means such as a clock circuit is separately provided on the upper decoration drive board 4200 to generate a clock signal, and the clock signal is not transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decoration drive board 4200. It may be configured to send and receive serial data by mutual clock signals.

In addition, for the wiring pattern of the output terminals of the driver ICs 4220 to 4228, in order to enhance the heat dissipation effect, the pattern width of the wiring pattern for the OUT1 terminal to the OUT4 terminal is set to, for example, 1.3 mm, and the wiring pattern for the VM terminal and the VCLANP terminal is set. The width of the wiring pattern to the fuse FUSE connecting the two is, for example, 2.5 mm. In this way, the wiring pattern width between the power supply and the fuse FUSE is made wider than the wiring pattern width for the output terminal. Thereby, the heat dissipation effect can be improved.

[Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 154. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 152 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 1510 is composed of a peripheral control unit 1511 and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1511 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[Processing when the peripheral control unit is turned on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 150. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 150. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of a game effect output from the main control board 1310 or a pachinko machine It is in a state where various commands such as a command related to the state of 1 can be received.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 has the effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. ), And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, and When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and cold start is performed.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 127 is also backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared.

When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 127 (SRAM). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set for Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 126 and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 126, and FIG. 127 In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit.

Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information in a range of 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness to turn on. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1.

By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 126. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 126. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the operation button 410 is operated based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 128 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. It is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. From the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 to various effects by the multiple LEDs and the multiple LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by the combined music and sound effects.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is sent to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which aspect to use.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage is started. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data is to be output.

Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing.

That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later (command analysis means).

The effect control program includes screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, and sound based on information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do.

Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. A normal symbol memory command for determining (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of pending starts changes, and a large winning opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in.

Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door frame open command or the door frame. Analyze whether it is a close command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc.

Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and so on. Various commands classified as related to synchronized production, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, the above-mentioned door frame opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame opening command and main body Various commands classified into status display such as frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), and test-related There are various commands and various commands classified into others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, the effect control program further executes various abnormality notifications when the commands analyzed in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified into the notification display as described above. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for the above, are displayed in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c at 1511cae. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into various commands, for example, status displays. In the case of the error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 ( The effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. The stored calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Based on the light emission data to be output, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. At the same time, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is provided to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates a sprite data on the game board side effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 127 is started to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as audio data serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to the maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 into the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in Bank0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 kb up to the contents stored in the end address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ) From the content stored in the start address to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from, and specify that the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is high-speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) up to the contents stored in the terminal address of the backup first area 1511db in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously backed up from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 1511dc. All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, which is shown in FIG. 126, is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described.

When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 151 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 150 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 150. Since it is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 150 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether it is completed or not. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing omission this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 150 will be described. ..

When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 152. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 150 in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 166. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 126 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the constituent time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the motor on the amplifier board side.

Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the storage area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor and write it. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process is performed on the motor drive board 4180 (including the above-mentioned upper decorative drive board 4200). Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c. Of the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, a motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT (including TXD4 in FIG. 148) for outputting the drive signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is created by extracting from the data, and is set in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127.

Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the required factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and sets the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the stored game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the buffer register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK (described as clock signal SCK4 in FIG. 148). ), 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK (described as clock signal SCK4 in FIG. 148), 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used. Is continuously transmitted by.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, FIG. 143) is shown by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. M-RXD, that is, motor original position history information, movable position history information, determination information, etc.) is created, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are acquired. Set in the storage area 1511cah. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, the determination information, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. It is possible to acquire the operation presence / absence of the operation button 410 from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 141 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 127 are created. The control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal to be output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Drawing state information acquisition From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the effect display device on the door frame side. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively, and backed up.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms). , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 kb up to the contents stored in the end address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc, and Bank0 (1 ms) is specified. ) From the content stored in the start address to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1ms), the start address of Bank3 (1ms) in the second area 1511cc is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from, and specify that the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 166, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 153 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the periphery The 1-byte information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status that is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main cycle serial data When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3 in step S1206, that is, the mode is the second byte of the main frequency serial data following the status of the first byte of the main frequency serial data, and the third byte of the main frequency serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and 3 of the main peripheral serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a shaving environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main peripheral serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 127, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are the received command storage areas. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216 and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the above mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 129, is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and then starts a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning). It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is started. The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511ca included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127 are combined with the Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is peripheral. As a requirement factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc. Then, a predetermined byte (for example,) from the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). , 1 byte) in succession Copy all in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first area 1511 kb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core. The content stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank 0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the receiving command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All the bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 1511 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 126 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a gives a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 150 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed. Therefore, the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[Judgment of judgment information]
Next, the determination of the determination information executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a (see FIG. 127, hereinafter simply referred to as the peripheral control MPU) will be described. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the acquisition of the information data transmitted from the motor drive board (upper decorative drive board 4200) to the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined cycles (for example, every 1 ms). It is executed in the movable body information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of 152.

In the present embodiment, the determination information fed back by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is determined, and whether or not serial communication is normally performed in the serial signal transmission line is checked.

As described above, the detection signals RO-SEN to ME-SEN (FIG. 147) from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. (See), the judgment information included in the motor excitation data M-TXD serially transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper decorative drive board 4200 [see FIG. 148 (A)], and the input to the A terminal of the parallel / serial IC 4250. (See FIG. 147) is serialized by the parallel / serial IC 4250 provided on the upper decorative drive board 4200 and output as serial data SEN SER (see FIG. 147).

Then, the serial data SEN SER is input to the CMOS IC 4210, output from the CMOS IC 4210 as the motor determination information data M-RXD (see FIG. 145), and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 via the connector CN2, the harness 5102, and the connector CN1. (See FIGS. 143 and 142).

This serialized motor determination information data M-RXD is one of various serial I / O ports 1511ae (see FIG. 127) for peripheral control inside the peripheral control MPU via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). It is input to a serial I / O port for a motor drive board. The peripheral control MPU is adapted to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the upper decorative drive board 4200 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the peripheral control MPU acquires the motor determination information data M-RXD, the peripheral control MPU switches the serial I / O port for the motor drive board to the input.

[Judgment information judgment processing]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of the determination information determination process executed by the peripheral control MPU as one of the movable body information acquisition processes (see FIG. 152) in step S1106. The determination information determination process is performed according to the reception timing chart of the serial data transmitted from the upper decorative drive substrate 4200 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. 149 (B).

When the peripheral control MPU starts the determination information determination process, it first outputs a latch signal RTRG (note that it is described as M-RTRG in FIG. 143) (step A200). By the way, the latch signal RTRG is output from various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag (see FIG. 127). Further, the latch signal RTRG is input to the shift / load terminal S / L of the parallel / serial IC 4250 as the feedback data latch signal M RTRG on the upper decorative drive board 4200, and the feedback data latch signal M RTRG is used for the parallel / serial IC 4250. When the level drops from the HI level to the LOW level, the serial data SEN SER is output. When the serial data SEN SER is input, the CMOS IC 4210 outputs the serial motor determination information data M-RXD.

The contents of the motor determination information data M-RXD are as shown in FIGS. 149 (A) and 149 (B) described above. When the peripheral control MPU outputs the latch signal RTRG, the peripheral control MPU then acquires the motor determination information data M-RXD bit by bit in the reception register (register built in the peripheral control MPU) (step A202). The determination information data M-RXD is acquired with the rising edge of the clock signal M SCK as the timing. Further, the contents of the motor determination information data M-RXD are acquired in bits 0 to 6 of the reception register.

Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the determination information is OK (step A204). The determination information is acquired in bit 6 of the receive register as shown in FIG. 149. Further, when the determination information is transmitted as a HI level signal (transmitted in the motor and solenoid drive processing in step S1104 of FIG. 152), if the value of bit 6 of the reception register is "1", it is determined to be OK. If the value of bit 6 is "0", it is not OK, that is, it is determined to be NG.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the determination information in step A204 is OK may be performed as follows. That is, if the value of the bit 6 is "1" multiple times in succession, it is determined to be OK, while if the value of the bit 6 is "0" multiple times in succession, it is not OK, that is, it is determined to be NG. You may.

The judgment information judgment processing is executed by the peripheral control MPU every 1ms (1ms timer interrupt processing). Further, in step S1104 of the previous stage, determination information is transmitted every 1 ms. From this, for example, if the value of bit 6 of the three consecutive reception registers is "1", it is determined to be OK, while if the value of bit 6 of the three consecutive reception registers is "0", it is NG. It may be determined.

If it is determined in step A204 that the determination information is OK, the process proceeds to step A206, the abnormality notification flag is set to "0 (normal)" (step A206), the determination information determination process is exited, and the movable body information Return to the acquisition processing routine. In this case, each detection information of the origin detection sensor for detecting the origin position of each of the motors a to e sent together with the judgment information as serial transmission data (judgment information data M-RXD) is highly reliable. It also becomes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A204 that the determination information is NG, the process proceeds to step A208, the abnormality notification flag is set to "1 (abnormality)" (step A208), and the determination information determination process is exited to move. Return to the body information acquisition processing routine. In this case, the reliability of each detection information of the origin detection sensor for detecting the origin position of each of the motors a to e sent together with the judgment information as serial transmission data (judgment information data M-RXD) is low. It also becomes.

If it is determined to be NG, the CMOS IC 4210 fails, the communication line (harness 5102) that transmits signals between the peripheral control board 1510 and the upper decorative drive board 4200 is broken, and the transfer data on the communication line due to the influence of noise. It is undeniable that there is a possibility that the data of (identification information) is garbled, the connector CN1 or CN2 of the communication line is about to come off (half-way) or comes off, or the drivers IC 4220 to 4228 may be out of order. Therefore, the abnormality is notified.

When "1 (abnormality)" is set in the abnormality notification flag, it is determined that "1 (abnormality)" is set in the abnormality notification flag in the lamp data creation process in step S1028 of FIG. 150. 1 and LED lighting data for lighting each LED (see FIGS. 88 to 90) in a predetermined mode (for example, 60 seconds) in the door frame top unit 570 of FIG. 87 is created.

Further, also in the sound data creation process in step S1032 of FIG. 150, it is determined that "1 (abnormality)" is set in the abnormality notification flag, and the voice (for example, "transmission line") is transmitted from the upper speaker 573 (see FIG. 88). Sound data is created to notify you with ".").

Then, the LED lighting data created in this way is output to various decorative substrates on the door frame 3 side in the lamp data output process of step S1012 in FIG. 150, so that each LED of the door frame top unit 570 is output. Lights up in a predetermined mode (for example, 60 seconds). Further, the sound data created in this way is finally transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in the sound data output process of step S1018 in FIG. 150, and for example, the sound is transmitted from the upper speaker 573 (see FIG. 88). (For example, "There is something wrong with the transmission line.")

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 6 CR unit 10 Upper frame member 11 Engagement notch 12 Mounting step 20 Lower frame member 21 Engagement notch 22 Front end notch 30 Left frame Member 31 Recessed 32 Protruding part 40 Right frame member 41 Recessed 42 Protruding part 50 Curtain plate member 51 Rear extension part 52 Left discharge hole 53 Right discharge hole 54 Standing wall part 55 Return part 56 Left mounting part 57 Right mounting part 60 Outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 Upper fixing part 62 Front extension part 63 Bearing groove 64 Horizontal fixing part 65 Hanging part 66 Lock member 66a Lock body 66b Operation part 66c Elastic part 66d Mounting hole 67 Mounting screw 70 Outer frame side lower hinge member 71 Horizontal part 72 Rising part 73 Lower outer frame hinge pin 74 Discharge hole
80 Curtain plate reinforcing member 81 Left sliding member 82 Right sliding member 85 Connecting member 85A Upper left connecting member 85B Upper right connecting member 85C Lower left connecting member 85D Lower right connecting member 86 Horizontal fixing part 87 Upper horizontal fixing part 88 Lower horizontal fixing part 89 Bending part 90 Upper hooking member 91 Lower hooking member 95 Guide blade 96 Guide blade 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through port 112 Handle mounting seat surface 113 Cylinder mounting part 114 Cylinder insertion hole 115 Ball feed opening 116 Lower plate passage port 117 Passage port for upper plate 118 Glass unit mounting part 119 Speaker insertion port 130 Reinforcement unit 131 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 132 Middle reinforcement sheet metal 132a Notch 133 Left reinforcement sheet metal 134 Right reinforcement sheet metal 135 Locking part 140 Door frame side upper hinge member 141 Door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141a Protruding piece 142 Door frame upper hinge pin 143 Door member 144 Lock spring 150 Door frame side lower hinge member 151 Door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151a Extension piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decorative board 161 Decorative board 161a LED on the left side of the door frame
162 Door frame Left side lower decorative board 162a LED
170 Glass unit mounting member 171 Base 172 Protruding part 180 Handle mounting member 181 Cylinder part 182 Flange part 183 Protrusion 184 Reinforcing rib 190 Glass unit 191 Glass frame 191a Mounting piece 191b Locking piece 192 Glass plate 194 Frame Decorative drive amplifier board 194a + 9V Creation circuit 200 Security cover 201 Main body 202 Rear protrusion 203 Locking piece 210 Opening / closing cylinder unit 211 Crank lock 211a Keyhole 212 Rotation transmission member 212a Notch 213 Crank mounting plate metal 213a Front plate 213b Side plate 213c Mounting plate 250 Ball feed Unit 251 Front cover 251a Advance entrance 251b Ball outlet 251c Slit 252 Rear cover 252a Ball hitting supply port 252b Mounting recess 253 Ball extraction member 253a Partition part 253b Rotating rod part 253c Acting rod 253d Ball part 253d Holding part 254c Sake part 255 Ball feed solenoid 256 Ball feed operation rod 257 Ball feed crank 257a Engagement part 257b Shaft part 257c Transmission part 260 Fraud prevention member 261 Upper piece part 262 Lower piece part 263 Inclined part 270 Fal cover unit 271 272 Lid member 273 Penetration ball passage 274 Full tank ball receiving port 275 Foul ball receiving port 276 Ball discharge port 277 Storage passage 278 Movable piece 279 Full tank detection sensor 280 Spring 281 Door opening / closing contact part 300 Handle unit 301 Handle base 301a Base 301b Front end 301c Groove 302 Handle 302a First protrusion 302b Second protrusion 302c Third protrusion 302d Fourth protrusion 302e Slit 302f Locking protrusion 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle Rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 Single-shot button 312 Single-shot button operation sensor 315 Handle relay terminal plate 320 Dish unit 321 Upper plate 321a Induction passage 321b Earth fitting 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate Ball removal hole (lower plate outlet)
322b Relief part 322c Ball guidance part (guidance means)
322d buffer (induction means)
322e return part (guidance means)
323 Dish unit base 323a Upper dish ball supply port 323b Speaker slit 323c Lower dish ball supply port (lower dish supply port)
323d Upper plate ball feed port 323e Ball feed taxiway 323f Ball removal taxiway 323g Opening 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper plate body 325 Lower plate body 325A Main body part 325B First extension part 325C Second extension part 325a Bottom Wall part 325b Main body standing wall part 326 Dish unit cover (covering part)
326a Production operation unit mounting part (covering part)
326b Dish front upper decoration part 326c Dish front lower decoration part 326d Lower plate opening 326e Lower speaker port 326f Handle insertion port 326g Cylinder insertion port 326h Top plate part 326i Bottom plate part 326j Mounting space 327 Upper plate ball removal button (discharge operation part)
327a Operation transmission unit 327b Ball removal slider 327c Upper plate ball removal spring 328 Ball rental button 329 Return button 330 Ball rental display unit 331 Production selection left button 332 Production selection right button 333 Lower plate ball removal button 334 Lid member 335 Lower plate ball Punch base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower plate cover 340a Cover standing wall part 340b Ceiling part 365 Frequency display board 365a Ball rental switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower plate 1st area A2 Lower plate 2nd area PL dividing line 400 Production operation unit (Cover)
400A Second production operation unit (covered part)
410 Operation button (operation receiving part)
411 Button lens 411a 1st button decoration 411b 2nd button decoration 412 Button frame 412a Frame opening 413 Button base 413a Main body 413b Flange 413c Guide boss 413d Detection piece 413e Base opening 415 Frame unit 416 Frame main body 416a Opening 416b Outer peripheral opening 416c Notch 416d Inner cylinder 416e Mounting 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Board unit 421 Board base 422 Operation button Left outer decoration board 422a First LED
422b 2nd LED
423 Operation button Right outer decorative board 423a First LED
423b 2nd LED
424 Vibration motor 424a Weight 425 Motor cover 430 Base unit 431 Unit base 431a Through hole 431b Holding hole 431c Light-shielding wall part 432 Operation button Interior decoration member 432a Peripheral wall part 432b Front plate part 432c Opening part 432d Flange part 432e Inner decoration part 423g Second button Inner decoration part 433 Operation button Left inner decoration board 434 Operation button Right inner decoration board 435 Operation button Upper inner decoration board 436 Operation button Lower inner decoration board 437 Frame top lens decoration board 438 Operation button Spring 439 Sensor holder 440 Pressing detection sensor 441 Production operation unit Relay board 442 Relay board cover 442a Leg 450 Second base unit 451 Unit base 451a Main body 451b Cover 451c Through hole 451d Holding hole 451e Upper bearing 451f Lower bearing 451g Rotation control 452 Button shaft 454 Pressure detection sensor 460 Door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A Door frame side second effect display device 461 Liquid crystal display device 462 Mounting bracket 470 Screen unit 471 Main screen 472 Sub screen 472a Peripheral decoration part 472b Screen part 473 Upper shaft member 474 Lower shaft member 475 Actuating gear member 475a Gear tooth 475b Stopper 475c Detection piece 476 Subscreen decoration member 477 Subscreen decoration board 477a LED
478 Peripheral decoration member 480 Upper bearing member 481 Bearing member 481a Recess 482 Frame top lens decorative substrate 485 Lower bearing member 490 Rotation drive unit 491 Unit case 492 Switching drive motor 495 Second transmission gear 500 Projector 501 Projector body 502 Lens part 505 Projector Mounting member 505a Slit 506 Top cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Cushioning unit 511 Cushioning member 512 Cushioning base 512a Main body 512b Leg piece 515 Second production operation unit Relay board 516 Relay board cover 530 Door frame Left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Opening 532 Left unit diffuser lens member 532A Upper diffuser lens member 532B Lower diffuser lens member 532a Circular lens part 532b Square lens part 532c Central diffuser lens part 532d Front diffuser lens part 532e Input lens part 532f Front reflection part 534 Left unit upper decoration base 535 Left unit lower decorative base 536 Left unit decorative cover 537 Decorative member 550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit base 552 Door frame right side decorative board 552A Door frame right side upper decorative board 552B Door frame right side lower decorative board 552a Left LED
552b right LED
552c medium LED
553 Right unit left diffuser lens member 553a Main body 553b Rear wall 553c Notch 553d Containment recess 553e Input lens 553f Side reflector 554 Right unit Left decorative member 555 Right unit Left cover 556 Right unit Right diffuser lens member 556a Main body 556b Rear wall part 556c Notch part 556d Storage recess 556e Input lens part 556f Side reflection part 557 Right unit Right decorative member 558 Right unit Right cover 559 Right unit Left shading member 559a Main body part 559b Rear wall part 559c Notch part 559d Reinforcement part 560 Right unit Right light-shielding member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative part 561b Multi-faceted decorative part 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decorative member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Center base 571 Side base 573 Upper speaker 574 Unit body 574a Opening 574b Slit 574c Upper opening 574d Lower opening 574e Top left decoration 574f Top right decoration 575 Speaker cover 576 Top middle decoration member 577 Door frame Top middle decoration board 578 Light guide member 578a Straight part 578b Arc part 578c Diffuse reflection part 578d Input part 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens part 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens part 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 Door frame Top left decorative board 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Board base 586 Door frame top Middle left Decorative board 586a LED
587 Door frame top Middle right decorative board 587a LED
588 Light-shielding member 589 Door frame Top unit Relay board 590 Relay board cover 591 Top cover 592 Bottom cover CL Center axis (of operation button 410)
600 Body frame base 601 Game board insertion port 602 Game board mounting part 603 Game board regulation part 604 Launcher mounting part 605 Cylinder insertion port 606 Connection opening 607 Speaker opening 608 Rear extension part 609 Upper hinge mounting part 610 Lower hinge mounting part 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame opening switch 619 Main body frame opening switch 620 Main body frame side Upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge Main body 622 Main body frame upper hinge pin 623 Door frame upper hinge hole 640 Main body frame side lower Hinge member 641 Lower hinge 1st body 643 Lower hinge 2nd body 644 Door frame hinge hole 645 Control piece 660 Reinforcement frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Ball launcher 681 Launch base 682 Launch solenoid 683 Launch rail 684 Launch rail 700 Locking unit 701 Unit base 702 Door frame hinge 703 Outer frame hinge 710 Key cylinder 784 External terminal board 800 Payout unit 801 Payout unit base 802 Ball tank 803 Tank rail 804 Ball leveling member 820 Ball guidance unit 821 Front case 821a Ball guidance inlet 821b Guidance outlet 821c Guidance passage 821d Introductory part 821e Detection part 821f Hinge part 821g Notch part 822 Rear case 822a Ball guidance entrance 822b Ball guidance outlet 822c Guidance passage 822d Introductory part 822e Detection part 822f Hinge part 8 Movable piece member front 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extension part 825d Connecting part 825e Weight mounting part 825f Detection piece 825g Stopper piece 826 Movable piece member rear 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extending part 826d Detection piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Ball out detection sensor 830 Discharge device 831 Front box 831a Discharge entrance 831b Discharge outlet 831c Ball extraction exit 831d Discharge passage 831e Ball extraction passage 831f Guidance shelf 831g Lever mounting part 831g Lever mounting part 832 Ball removal outlet 832d Discharge passage 832e Ball removal passage 832f Guidance shelf 832g Lever mounting part 833 Front Cover 834 Discharge motor 835 Drive gear 836 Intermediate gear 837 Driven gear 837a Gear part 837b Detection piece 837c Connecting part 838 Shaft member 839 Dispensing blade 839a Base cylinder part 839b Front blade 839c Rear blade 839d Connected part 839e Sensor 841 Partition plate 842 Payout detection sensor 843 Ball pulling movable piece 843a Main body part 843b Shaft cylinder part 843c Protruding part 843d Weight mounting part 844 Ball pulling lever 850 Upper full tank ball path unit 850a Upper payout ball receiving port 850b Upper ball pulling entrance 850c Upper ball storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Section section 850g Upper ball removal passage 850h Upper ball removal outlet 851 Upper full tank base 852 Upper full tank cover 853 Discharge device pressing member 854 Back cover mounting part 860 Lower full tank ball Route unit 860b Error LED display 869 Game ball rental device Connection terminal board 861 Normal guideway 862 Full tank guideway 863 Guideway opening / closing door 863a Base 863b First door plate part 863c Second door plate part 863d Extension part 863e Operation Protrusion 864 Closing spring 865 Lower ball pulling guide path 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss part 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal board 869 Game ball rental device connection terminal board 870 Guide path opening / closing door 870a Base 870b First door plate 870c Two door plate part 870d Recess 870e Operating protrusion 880 Main door relay terminal board 882 Peripheral door relay terminal board 900 Board unit 910 Board unit base 911 Door frame relay board 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power supply board box 934 Power switch 931 Power supply board 935 Power supply control unit 935a Synchronous rectifier circuit 935b Power factor improvement circuit 935c Smoothing circuit 935d Power supply creation circuit 940 Interface control board box 950 Payout control board box 951 Payout control board 951a Payout control filter circuit 952 Payout control unit 952a Payout control MPU
952b Payout control input circuit 952c Payout control output circuit 952d Payout motor drive circuit 952da Voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input / output circuit 953 Launch control unit 953a Launch control circuit 954 Operation switch 980 Back cover 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guidance part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Impulsion part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Security recess 1009 Positioning protrusion 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch part 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engagement step 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step 1122 Through port 1123 Protruding pin 1124 Engagement claw 1125 Engagement piece 1126 Out port 1127 Notch 1128 Mounting hole 1129 Insertion port 1150 Game panel (second embodiment) )
1151 Out port 1152 Notch 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Board holder 1201 Discharge part

1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1310a Main control MPU
1310aa Main control CPU core 1310ae Main circumference serial transmission port 1310aea Transmission shift register 1310aeb Transmission buffer register 1310aec Serial management unit 1310af WDT
1310an Hard random number circuit 1310b Main control input circuit 1310c Main control output circuit 1310ca Main control output circuit with reset function 1310cc Main control output circuit without reset function 1310d Main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e Power failure monitoring circuit 1300g + 5V creation circuit 1300h Main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status display 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special hold number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special hold number display 1407 Round display Instrument 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b + 3.3V creation circuit 1511 Peripheral control unit 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa Peripheral control CPU core 1511ab Peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad Peripheral control bus controller 1511ae Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511af Peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ak Peripheral control A / D converter 1511ai Peripheral bus 1511ah Internal bus 1511b Peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display control unit 1512a VDP with built-in sound source
1512b LCD and sound control ROM
1512c Audio data transmission IC
1512d Transmitter IC for door frame side production
1512e Differential circuit 1512f Forced switching circuit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Game board side effect display device (first effect display means)
1600a LCD module 1600b Backlight power supply 1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting port 2005 Large winning port 2100 Starting port unit 2101 Unit base 2102 Ball receiver 2103 Front decoration base member 2104 Front center decoration board 2105 Front decoration member 2105a Fake part 2106 Induction passage member 2107 Start solenoid 2108 Attacker solenoid 2200 Side unit bottom 2300 Side unit top 2500 Center accessory 2520 Warp inlet 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid crystal mounting part 3010c Fixed groove 3010d Notch 3010e Fixed piece part 3042 Direction drive board box 3050 Back left middle decoration unit 3100 Back bottom rear movable production unit 3200 Back top left movable production unit 3300 Back left movable production unit 3400 Back-up middle movable production unit 3500 Back-bottom front movable production unit 4002 First start port sensor 4003 Gate sensor 4004 Second start port sensor 4005 Count sensor 4020 General winning port sensor 4024 Magnetic detection sensor 4026 Vibration detection sensor 4161 Panel relay board 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

1513 Peripheral serial data output means 4200 Top decorative drive board 4205 Safety circuit 4210 CMOS IC
4220 Driver IC
4222 Driver IC
4224 Driver IC
4226 Driver IC
4228 Driver IC
4230 Monitoring circuit 4232 IC
4250 Parallel / Serial IC (Driven Serial Data Output Means)
4300a-4300e Stepping motor 5102 Harness

4450 Production display drive board 4450v LCD module circuit 4450x Door frame side production module power supply circuit 4450y Door frame side production module backlight power supply circuit

Claims (1)

The main control board that controls the progress of the game,
Peripheral control board that performs production control and
A control board that controls the effect unit based on the control data transmitted from the peripheral control board is provided.
The peripheral control board and the control board are connected to communicate and connect the control data.
The peripheral control board has a control data output means for outputting the control data to the control board.
The main control board includes a first driver circuit unit that is electrically connected to the first drive source and drives the first drive source.
The control board, a second drive source and is electrically connected to a gaming machine having a second driver circuit for driving the second drive source,
The second drive source driven by the second driver circuit unit is via a current blocking component that can block the current by flowing a current exceeding a predetermined current provided on the control board. through driving source power supply line connected to the second driving source, the power drive source of the supply voltage and the same potential to the first drive source connected the main control board and electrically is Ru is supplied,
A game machine characterized by that.

Images